Volume 11 IBook

126065-Catalog 1 126065-Catalog_1 126065-Catalog_1 Batch9 unilog cesco-content

121606-Attachment 121606-Attachment 121606-Attachment 782116 Batch8 unilog cesco-content

: Pdf 121606-Attachment 121606-Attachment 786685 Batch8 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 202

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 11:

Vehicle and
Commercial
Controls

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Control
Tab 1—Electronic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-1
Tab 2—Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-1
Tab 3—Special Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-1
Tab 4—Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-1
Tab 5—Dimmers and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-1
Tab 6—Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-1
Tab 7—Definitions and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T7-1

11

Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings
Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications
This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21
Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.

These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

Copyright ©2014 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Introduction

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,
control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
●

Reliability—maintain the
appropriate level of power
continuity without
disruption or unexpected
downtime

●

Efficiency—minimize
energy usage, operating
costs, equipment footprint
and environmental impact

●

Safety—identify and
mitigate electrical hazards
to protect what you value
most

Using the Eaton Catalog Library
As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
●

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 1—Residential
and Light Commercial
(CA08100002E)
Volume 2—Commercial
Distribution (CA08100003E)
Volume 3—Power
Distribution and Control
Assemblies (CA08100004E)
Volume 4—Circuit
Protection (CA08100005E)
Volume 5—Motor Control
and Protection
(CA08100006E)
Volume 6—Solid-State
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)

●

●

●

●

●

Volume 7—Logic Control,
Operator Interface and
Connectivity Solutions
(CA08100008E)
Volume 8—Sensing
Solutions (CA08100010E)
Volume 9—Original
Equipment Manufacturer
(CA08100011E)
Volume 10—Enclosed
Control (CA08100012E)
Volume 11—Vehicle and
Commercial Controls
(CA08100013E)

●

●

●

●

Volume 12—Aftermarket,
Renewal Parts and Life
Extension Solutions
(CA08100014E)
Volume 13—Counters,
Timers and Tachometers
(CA08100015E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 14—Fuses
(CA08100016E)—Available
in electronic format only
Volume 15—Solar Inverters
and Electrical Balance of
System (CA08100018E)

These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
●

The Consulting Application
Guide (CA08104001E)

●

The Eaton Power Quality
Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls

CA08100013E—August 2014

www.eaton.com

i

Introduction

Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

Product Selection Guide
TAB 1—Electronic Products
Description

Page

E31 eSM

V11-T1-2

E30 eSM

V11-T1-7

E32 eSM

V11-T1-10

E33 eSM

V11-T1-14

eVu

V11-T1-17

TAB 2—Rockers
Description

Page

Introduction

V11-T2-2

NGR

V11-T2-8

SVR

V11-T2-32

Dual Motion Safety Switch

V11-T2-41

1500/2500

V11-T2-43

1600/2600

V11-T2-47

Rockette

V11-T2-54

8006/8007—EURO SR

V11-T2-62

8004/8005 Euro Full-Size

V11-T2-65

X Series

V11-T2-68

8064/8065 ESPORT

V11-T2-72

Accessories

V11-T2-76

Technical Data

V11-T2-78

Symbol Library

V11-T2-80

TAB 3—Special Devices

ii

Description

Page

High Capacity Switches

V11-T3-2

Panelboard Switches

V11-T3-3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated

V11-T3-5

Locking Rocker

V11-T3-9

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014

www.eaton.com

Introduction

TAB 4—Toggle Switches
Description

Page

Introduction

V11-T4-2

Military Purpose Toggles

V11-T4-3

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

V11-T4-9

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

V11-T4-11

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

V11-T4-20

X Series Toggles

V11-T4-24

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

V11-T4-27

Accessories

V11-T4-31

Technical Data

V11-T4-35

TAB 5—Dimmers and Wipers
Description

Page

Paddle and Slide Controls

V11-T5-2

Rotary Wipers

V11-T5-4

TAB 6—Pushbuttons
Description

Page

AC Rated

V11-T6-2

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

V11-T6-8

XP Series Sealed Pushbutton

V11-T6-21

TAB 7—Definitions and Index
Description

Page

Definitions

V11-T7-1

Index

V11-T7-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls

CA08100013E—August 2014

www.eaton.com

iii

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Multiplexed Keypad

1.1

E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplex Rocker
Switch Units

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

V11-T1-3
V11-T1-4
V11-T1-5
V11-T1-5

V11-T1-7
V11-T1-7
V11-T1-7
V11-T1-8
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-9

V11-T1-10
V11-T1-10
V11-T1-10
V11-T1-11
V11-T1-11
V11-T1-12
V11-T1-13

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5

V11-T1-2

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4

V11-T1-2

E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3

V11-T1-2

V11-T1-14
V11-T1-14
V11-T1-14
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-16

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T1-17
V11-T1-17
V11-T1-17
V11-T1-17
V11-T1-17

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-1

1.1
1

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

Contents
Description
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
1

Page
V11-T1-3
V11-T1-4
V11-T1-5
V11-T1-5

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Because your vehicle is
continuously exposed to
nature’s elements, we offer
the latest in Eaton’s
multiplexed line of switch
product, the E31 Keypad
eSM. Eaton’s E31 Keypad
eSM multiplex switch module
offers a flexible and sealed
solution for high-density
switch requirements in
severe environments. The
keypad can be configured
with any graphic/switch,
as well as with customerdefined illumination. For
customers requiring
additional switches,
expansion modules can
be used with no requirement
for additional CAN nodes. For
additional product flexibility
and differentiated operator
control, the E31 Keypad eSM
is designed to communicate
with Eaton’s E32 and E33
sealed rocker expansion
modules.

Great for specialty vehicle,
construction, and agricultural
equipment markets. The eSM
product is especially suitable
for severe environmental
applications and where there
is a desire to move to a
multiplexed solution to
simplify wiring and control
requirements. Typical
applications are:

Key Features

1

Target Market Segments:
●
Tractors
●
Wheel loaders
●
Refuse vehicles
●
Concrete mixers
●
Street sweepers
●
Mining equipment
●
Emergency vehicles
●
Transit buses

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●

1
1
1

Fully compliant with
J1939/CAN 2.0b
messaging
IP68 degree of protection
from front and rear of
module
Rocker and keypad
expansion module
capability
Exceptional illumination
characteristics
●
LED backlighting of
icons
●
Four color daylightvisible indicators per
switch
●
Message-controlled
dimming and flash rates
Large switch surface area
and alignment ridges for
ease of gloved hand use
Exceptional tactile and
audible feedback of switch
actuation
Electrical/mechanical life to
over 1,000,000 cycles
9–32 Vdc operating voltage
Immunity per SAE
J1455/1113
●
Power disturbance
●
Radiated immunity
●
Radiated emissions

1
1
V11-T1-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

Advantages
●

●

●

●

●

Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of eight
switches at one time as
opposed to individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity; uses one
harness to a controller,
reducing wiring,
connection point, and
controller requirements
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in life-cycle
over traditional
electromechanical
switches
Front, rear, and panel
sealing for harsh
environments

1.1

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

Catalog Number Selection

1

How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module, 2x4
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Series
E31 = Keypad

Rows
2 = 2 rows

E31

2

4 M

Communication
M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)
E = Expansion (LIN)

4

W 1

Indicators
4 = Red, amber, green, blue
G = Green
O = Orange

CV

1

1

Backlighting
W = White
G = Green
A = Amber

Indicators
1 = Indicators
2 = No indicators

Address 2
1 = Address 1
2 = Address 2
FF = Expansion

Icons 1
CV = Circle
XX = No icon

Columns
4 = 4 columns

Series
E31 = Keypad

Rows
4 = 4 rows

4

1
1
1
1

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

E31

1

1

How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Master Module, 4x3

Example:

1

3

Communication
M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)

M 4

W

Indicators
4 = Red, amber, green, blue

CV 1
Backlighting
W = White

1
1

Icons 1
CV = Circle
XX = No icon

1

Address 2
= Address 1

Columns
3 = 3 columns

1
1
1
1

How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Master Module, 3x5
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Series
E31 = Keypad

Rows
3 = 3 rows

E31

3

Communication
M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b)

5

M 4

W

Indicators
4 = Red, amber, green, blue

CV 1
Backlighting
W = White

Icons 1
CV = Circle
XX = No icon

Address 2
1 = Address 1

1
1
1
1
1

Columns
5 = 5 columns

1

Notes
1 Contact Eaton sales for custom graphics. See V11-T2-80–V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95–V11-T2-102, symbols library, for available graphics.
2 For use of multiple masters on one system. (Address 3–8 available as special order.)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-3

1.1

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

1

Product Selection

1

Master

1

E3124M4W1CV1

1

E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 2x4
Basic Part

Indicator Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3124M

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

1

E3124M4W1CV1

2

E3124M4W1CV2

1

E3124M4W1XX1

2

E3124M4W1XX2

1

E3124MGG1CV1

2

E3124MGG1CV2

1

E3124MGG1XX1

2

E3124MGG1XX2

1

E3124MOA1CV1

2

E3124MOA1CV2

1

E3124MOA1XX1

2

E3124MOA1XX2

1

None

1

Green

Green

1

Circle

None

1

Orange

Amber

1

Circle

None

1
1
1

E3143M—Custom

1

E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 4x3
Basic Part

Indicator Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3143M

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

1

E3143M4W1CV1

2

E3143M4W1CV2

1

E3143M4W1XX1

2

E3143M4W1XX2

1

None

1
1
1

E3135M—Custom

1

E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 3x5
Basic Part

Indicator Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3135M

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

1

E3135M4W1CV1

2

E3135M4W1CV2

1

None

1
1
1
1

E3124EGG1XXFF

1

E3135M4W1XX2

E31 Keypad eSM Expansion Module, 2x4 1
Basic Part

Indicator Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3124E

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

FF

E3124E4W1CVFF

None

FF

E3124E4W1XXFF

Circle

FF

E3124EGG1CVFF

None

FF

E3124EGG1XXFF

Circle

FF

E3124EOA1CVFF

None

FF

E3124EOA1XXFF

Green

1
1

E3135M4W1XX1

Expansion

1

1

1
2

Orange

Green

Amber

Note
1 Expansion keypad module is available in 2x4 configuration only.

1
1
V11-T1-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

1.1

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

Technical Data and Specifications
Environmental and
Electronic Specifications

The interconnection between
the master module and the
controller uses a minimum
four-wire harness with an
additional two pins associated
to expansion module
interconnection. Wire sizes
of 16–20 AWG can be
accommodated with the
Deutsch connector shown
in the mating connector
information.

●

Wiring Harness

●

PIN

Master

●

●

●
●

●
●

Expansion

Vbat

Vbat

2

Common

Common

3

CAN (+)

LIN

4

CAN (–)

LIN

5

Common

Common

6

LIN

Vbat

E32 and E33 Rocker
Expansion Modules

Deutsch DT Series connector

The Keypad eSM master
module is capable of
supporting Eaton’s E32 and
E33 product line of rocker
eSMs. The E32 and E33
product line is an abovepanel–style rocker switch
module that contains any
combination of rocker or
indicator functionality with
no additional CAN node
requirement to the system.
Similar to the keypad, the
rocker module offers icon
graphic illumination with up to
four center indicator bar LEDs
for status or mode. This
product is also fully functional
to support dimming and
flashing capabilities through
software command.

6-pin connector: DT06-6S
●
EP11 (Black–Master)
●
E008 (Gray–Expansion)
6-pin wedge lock: W6S
Female terminal:
0462-201-16141
(16-18-20 AWG)
Hole plug: 0413-217-1605
Crimper: HDT-48-00

E
QU

1

3
2
1

30
I
4
5
6

(3.4 N-m)
LB
N-

1

Operational temperature:
–40° to +85°C
Storage temperature:
–40° to +95°C
Operational voltage:
9–32 Vdc
Degree of protection: IP68
Mechanical shock: 30g for
11 msec
Handling drop: 1m
Electrical/mechanical life:
1M cycles
Load dump
●
SAE J1455: 100V/12V
systems
●
SAE J1113/11: 174V for
24V systems

1

Mating Connector
Information

XIMUM T
MA
OR

Master Module Wiring
Harness

6

XXXX
XXXXXXXX
MADE IN MEXICO

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
2x4 Mounting Dimensions
Ø 50.8
[2.00]
Ø 5.54
[0.218]
2X

34.70
[1.37]

1

E31 Keypad Master or Expansion Module

Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—8X

15.5 [0.61]

1

18.5
[0.73]

Lighted
Indicators
Optional
as Required

1

15.5
[0.61]

1
1

66.2
[2.61]

69.40 [2.73]

1

16.0
[0.63]

1
1
97.2 [3.83]

15.2
[0.60]

1

17.1
[0.67]

1
1

17.7 [0.70]

32.2
[1.27] Max.

1
M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 2X (Included)
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)

1
1
1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-5

1.1
1
1

Electronic Products
E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
4x3 Mounting Dimensions

1
1

Ø31.75
[1.25]

1

Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—12X

15.5 [0.61]

Lighted
Indicators
Optional
as Required

18.5
[0.73]
15.5
[0.61]

95.25
[3.75]
50.80
[2.00]

1
1

E31 Keypad Master Module

Ø5.54
[0.218]
4X

30.83
[1.21]

16.0
[0.63]

38.10
[1.50]

Recommended Panel Opening

1

32.2
[1.27]
Max.

127.5
[5.02]

Depth with
Mating
15.2 Connector
[0.60]

1

17.1
[0.67]

1
1
1

74.0 [2.91]

1

17.7 [0.70]

1
M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 4X (Included)
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)

1
1
1

3x5 Mounting Dimensions

1
1

63.50
[2.50]

1

Ø32.50
[1.280]
Ø5.54
[0.218]

Backlit Daylight
White Graphics
Area—15X

15.5 [0.61]

18.5
[0.73]

Lighted Indicators
Optional as Required

15.5
[0.61]

56.23
[2.21]

1
1

20.50
[0.81]

E31 Keypad Master Module

88.90 [3.50]
Recommended Panel Opening

1

97.0
[3.82]

16.0
[0.63]

32.2
[1.27]
Max.
Depth with
Mating
Connector

1
1
1

121.1 [4.77]

1

15.2
[0.60]

17.1
[0.67]

17.7 [0.70]

1

M5 x 0.8 Nut and
Lock Washer 4X (Included)
Maximum Torque:
30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)

1
1
V11-T1-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.2

Contents

E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Description
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
V11-T1-8
V11-T1-9
V11-T1-10

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Description
Tailored to meet the same
look and feel of Eaton’s NGR
product line, the E30 eSM
offers the added benefits of
multiplexed control and
system simplification. The
E30 eSM is a below-panel
styled multiplexed rocker
module capable of
communicating via SAE
J1939 CAN 2.0b. The
modules are set up in a
master-expansion
configuration capable of
supporting up to seven

1

Application Description
expansion modules per
master thus minimizing the
impact on a controller to a
single CAN node.
Additionally, up to eight
master modules per system
can be accommodated.
Communication with the
expansion modules is done
via a four-wire sub-bus.
Multiplexing of switches can
significantly reduce harness
costs and complexity as
well as improve installation
cycle time.

Master Expansion Modules

The E30 eSM is especially
suited for applications that
require both high current
independently wired
switches using Eaton NGR
switches as well as those
applications realizing the
benefits of multiplexing. The
E30 eSM is styled to match
the Eaton NGR switch for a
consistent look and feel to
your dash panel.
The E30 eSM also has the
capability of having a separate
input for key switch and
dimmer control functions to
increase the flexibility of the
product to interface seamlessly
to your vehicle.

Customization of the E30
eSM is done by creating an
application specific rocker
with icons representing the
function as well as by use
of colored LEDs to highlight
status. Two and three
position as well as momentary
or maintained circuits are
identified using a sub-actuator
to offer complete flexibility.
Target Market Segments:
Motor coach/bus
●
Specialty vehicle
●
Truck
●

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
Master

1
1

Expansion

1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-7

1.2

Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

E30 eSM Specifications

1

Description
Power supply

1

Operating temperature
Storage temperature

1
1

Switch life cycle

1

SAE J1455
Description

Specification

12 Vdc regulated power, 1.5A

Dust test (Non-operational)

SAE J726 Course

–40° to 85°C

Mechanical vibration

2gs from 10 to 2 kHz

–40° to 85°C

Mechanical shock

30g

Sealing

IP42

Handling drop

1m, 3-axis

Illumination

Dependent or search lighting, customer defined LED color

Load dump transient

Table 4A and 4B

Specification

250,000 cycles

Over-voltage

48 Vdc for 5 mins

Mechanical life

250,000 cycles

Under-voltage

4 Vdc for 5 mins

Radiated immunity

1

Radiated emissions

SAE J1113/41, Class 2

Dimming

0–10 Vdc Analog Input (0 = 0% and 10V = 100% brightness)

Connectors

Delphi Micro VHT 15499927
Delphi Micro VHT 13513469

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

–28 Vdc for 5 mins

Electrical life

1
1

Reverse voltage

SAE J1113/21, 100 v/m

Power Supply

Communication

Message Contents

A regulated 12 Vdc power
supply capable of providing
1.5A should be connected
to terminals 1, 5 and 6
of the six-pole connector
of the master module only.
All connected expansion
modules receive their
supply power from the
master module.

The communication to and
from the master module is
fully compliant to the SAE
J1939/CAN 2.0b protocol.

Status

Diagnostics
The LED indicators at the
back of the modules show
the status of the internal
diagnostics as follows:
Diagnostics

Byte

Status

Byte 1

Master module status

Byte 2

Expansion module 1 status

Byte 3

Expansion module 2 status

Byte 4

Expansion module 3 status

Transmission Repetition

Byte 5

Expansion module 4 status

Description

Specification

Byte 6

Expansion module 5 status

Transmission
repetition rate

100 ms

Byte 7

Expansion module 6 status

Byte 8

Expansion module 7 status

Data length

8 bytes

Data page

0

PDU format
PDU specific
Default priority

5

Parameter group
number

65440

The application-specific
J1939 message parameters
are as follows:

255

Within each status byte,
the bits are assigned to the
individual switches as follows:

The two status bit pairs
represent the switch state
in the following manner:

160

Bit

Switch

Bit

Switch

Bit 8&7

Not defined

00

Switch in DOWN position

Bit 5&6

Switch 1 status

01

Switch in MIDDLE position

Bit 3&4

Switch 2 status

10

Switch in UP position

Switch 3 status

11

Not defined

Label

Color

Meaning

1

J1939
ACTIVE

Red

CANbus
active

1

MODULE
ACTIVE

Amber

Sub bus
active

Bit 1&2

1

SWITCH
CHANGE

Green

Switch
change

where the switches are
numbered as shown
below.

where the position
assignment is as shown
below.

Switches

Position Assignment

1

Rocker
Position
C
B
A

1
1

Switch
1

1

Switch
2

Switch
3

1
1

A = DOWN
B = MIDDLE
C = UP

1
V11-T1-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

1.2

Electronic Products
E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Wiring

1

The master unit is connected using six unshielded wires. The
connection from the master to the first expansion module and
between any consecutive expansion modules is made using
four unshielded wires.

1
1

Expansion Module

Master Module

1
J1939 ACTIVE

MODULE ACTIVE

MODULE ACTIVE

SWITCH CHANGE

1

SWITCH CHANGE

1
1
Pin
4
3
2
1

Function
Vcc out
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –

Pin
6
5
4
3
2
1

Function
Keyswitch
Dimmer
Ground
J1939 +
J1939 –
+12 Vdc

Master wiring:
●
Six unshielded wires

Pin
4
3
2
1

Function
Vcc out
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –

Pin
4
3
2
1

1

Function
Vcc in
Ground
Sub bus +
Sub bus –

1
1
1

Expansion wiring:
Four unshielded wires

1

●

1
Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Dimensions

1

E30 eSM Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

If you want to mount the
modules in a panel, the
opening in the panel should
be rectangular, 2.835 in wide
and 1.732 in high (72.00 mm
wide and 44.00 mm high).

1
1

1.97
(50.0)

The panel thickness should
be between 0.039 and
0.157 in (1.00 and 4.00 mm).

1
1

2.99 (76.0)

Panel
Opening

1

0.47
(11.9)

0.10
(2.54)

1

1.734
(44.00)

1.85
(46.9)

1

1.22
(31.1)

1
1

2.835 (72.00)

1
2.82 (71.7)

1.70 (43.2)

1
1
1
1
1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-9

1.3
1

Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Contents

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Description
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
1

Page
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-13
V11-T1-15
V11-T1-17

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Description
Multiplexed Master Module
using a LIN sub bus to
communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Offering a high level of
flexibility, the above-panel
electronic multiplex switch
module (E32 eSM) covers
your wide range of switch
and indicator applications
using standard or custom
graphics, as well as a full
range of circuits and
illumination options. The
above-panel E32 eSM has
top, center and bottom LED
lighting with software that
offers advanced circuit and
lighting flexibility, including
dimming and flashing options
via J1939 CANbus
communication. The indicator
bar can be lighted with up to
four separate colors to
indicate operational status,
vehicle mode and faults. All
standard combinations of
maintained and momentary
switch actions, matching
indicator caps and dummy
plugs, along with the
complementary styled SVR
electromechanical rocker
switch are available to
complete the offering.

Application Description
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●

●

●

●

Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)

Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at the
bus/coach, truck and
specialty vehicle markets.
The product is especially
suitable where a customer
has “gangs” of switches
mounted in a panel or
dashboard, and expansion
modules can be connected
easily to a master module.
●
●
●
●
●
●

On-road specialty vehicle
EMS vehicles
Street sweepers
Recreational vehicles
Motor coach/bus
Refuse vehicles

1
1
1
V11-T1-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

Features and Benefits
●

●

●

●
●

●

●
●

●

●

●

●

●
●

Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
LED lighting in top, center
and bottom positions
Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory and
accommodate multiple
application requirements
9–16 Vdc operating voltage
16–32 Vdc operating
voltage
IP53 degree of protection
from the front
Easy address assignment
Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
Wake on switch change
configurable
Decorative-style rocker
with matching indicator
option available
Colored rocker options
CAN controlled digital logic
output—500 mA

1.3

Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Product Selection

1

Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered.
Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

1
1
1

Status Bar

Icons

1
1
1

Modules
Voltage

Module

Icon Lighting

Status Bar Lighting

Catalog Number

9–16V

Master

Amber

Amber

E321AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E321GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E321W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E322AAAAAAAAA01

Expansion

Indicator expansion

16–32V

Master

Expansion

Indicator expansion

Green

Green

E322GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E322W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E322AAAAAAAAAI7

Green

Green

E322GGGGGGGGGI7

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E322W4WW4WW4WI7

Amber

Amber

E323AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E323GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E323W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E324AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E324GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E324W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E324AAAAAAAAAI7

Green

Green

E324GGGGGGGGGI7

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E324W4WW4WW4WI7

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Accessories
Rockers

1

Circuit Sub-Actuators

Color

Description

Catalog Number

Color

Circuit (Up-Middle-Down)

Black

Full-throw actuator

53-7350

Black

On

On

None

61-4043

Half-throw up actuator

53-7350-2

Red

Momentary

On

None

61-4043-2

Half-throw down actuator

53-7350-3

Light blue

On

On

On

61-4043-3

Full-throw actuator

53-7350-4

White

Momentary

On

Momentary

61-4043-4

Half-throw up actuator

53-7350-5

Yellow

Momentary

On

On

61-4043-5

Half-throw down actuator

53-7350-6

Gray

On

None

On

61-4043-6

Red

Black

Catalog Number

Indicator

53-7354

Pink

Momentary

None

On

61-4043-7

Dummy plug

53-7354-2

Maroon

None

On

On

61-4043-8

Panel plug

17-24241

Light purple

None

On

Momentary

61-4043-9

Orange

On

On

Momentary

61-4043-10

Green

On

None

Momentary

61-4043-11

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-11

1.3
1
1

Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Wiring
Master Module Wire
Harness

The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness with addressing
specified by jumping
between pins 6 to 9. An
additional pin-out is provided
for a 500 mA output if
required.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Expansion Module Wire
Harness

Mating Connector Information

Mating Connector Information
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
CAN high
CAN low
500 mA
output
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
No connect
No connect
No connect

Pin
1
2
3

Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus

Housing:
ETN 28-6982
●
Amp/Tyco #1394048-1
●
ETN 49-7867
●
Amp/Tyco #2-1355524-3
●

1
1
1

Master Address Assignment

Manufacturing Flexibility

The master switch module
address is set using jumpers
in the wire harness to
connect the following pins:

E32 eSM offers a
tremendous amount of
flexibility including options for
complete assemblies to be
provided as well as late-point
definable rocker and circuit.
Individual components can be
purchased independently and
assembled to create any
combination of circuits and
icons which is especially
suited for low volume/high
mix applications minimizing
inventory requirements.
Rockers and indicators can
also be laser-etched with
custom icons by Eaton or
other to accommodate
application specific
requirements. Contact your
Eaton representative to
discuss the Eaton solution
further.

Master Address Assignment

Pin
1
2
3

Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus

Pin
1
2
3

Function
VBAT
(clamp 30)
Ground
LIN sub bus

Terminal Pins
Connected

Address

6–7

A1

1

6–8

A2

1

6–9

A3

7–8

A4

1

7–9

A5

8–9

A6

1

6–7, 8–9

A7

6–8, 7–9

A8

V11-T1-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

1

1
1

Terminal:
ETN 28-6983
●
Amp/Tyco #1-1718346-1
Coding A
●
ETN 80-20608
●
Amp/Tyco #963715-1
●

1
1

The interconnection between
modules uses a costeffective three-wire harness.
This simplified wire harness
reduces cost, weight and
assembly labor for the enduser.

1
1
1
1
1

Electronic Products
E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.3

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in mm

1

Mounting Instructions
The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips. Modules are mounted in
a single, space-saving cutout,
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact
design.

1

The unit will accommodate
1.5 to 3 mm panel thickness.

1
1
1
1

Mounting Dimensions
61.4 ± 0.2

1

38.2
Max.

1
1

37.6 ± 0.3

41.0 ± 0.3

1
1
1

3.90 4X

1

61.60

1
45°
38.20

1

4X

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-13

1.4
1

Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Contents
Description
E33 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
1

Page
V11-T1-22
V11-T1-22
V11-T1-22
V11-T1-23

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Description
Sealed Multiplexed Master
Module using a LIN sub bus
to communicate with up to
seven expansion modules.
Eaton is pleased to introduce
the newest line of multiplexed
electronic Switch Modules
(eSM), the E33 product line.
The E33 eSM offers an
increased level of flexibility
over previous modules
including:

1

●

1

●

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

●

Application Description
Compared with
electromechanical
switches, multiplexed
switch modules offer
several advantages.
●

●

Fully sealed to IP68 from
the front and rear
Locking rocker options
Palm guard option

The E33 eSM offers a
complete range of switch
circuits as well as indicator
options to meet all your
control requirements. Similar
to the E32 eSM product line,
the E33 eSM includes
individual icon lighting as well
as a multi-color center
indicator option allowing for
steady state, flashing and
dimming controlled via
messaging. Additional
flexibility is available by using
the Eaton IP68 sealed SVR
switch line for high-current,
hard-wired applications in
conjunction with our
multiplexed solution.

●

●

●

Reduced assembly labor
due to ease of installation,
allowing for mounting and
connection of three
switches at one time
versus individually
Reduced wire harness
complexity, using one
harness to a controller to
accommodate up to 24
switches and a three-wire
interconnect between
expansion and master
modules
Reduced harness size
offers an overall reduction
in weight, improving
operational efficiency of
the equipment
Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional
electromechanical
switches (500k cycles)
Reduced connections
resulting in less possible
failure points

Target Market Segments
This product is targeted at
harsh environment
applications where a
ruggedized product is needed
to meet demanding
requirements. Additionally,
applications where there is
concern over inadvertent
switch actuation driving the
need for guarding or locking
features are also well-suited.
Typical applications include:
●
●
●
●
●

Construction equipment
Agricultural equipment
Specialty vehicle
Material handling
Emergency vehicle
School and transit bus

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

V11-T1-14

●

●

●
●

●

●
●

●
●

1
1

Features and Benefits

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

●

●

●

●

●

Fully compliant with J1939
CAN 2.0b messaging
IP68 degree of protection
front and rear
9–32 Vdc rated
Immune to SAE J1455 and
J1113 power disturbances
Top, bottom and full guard
option available
Locking rocker available
Front panel removable for
ease of maintenance
Sleep mode available to
reduce current draw on the
battery
Wake on switch change
configurable
LED lighting in top, centerindicator and bottom
position
Decorative style rocker
with matching indicator
option
Late point definition of
circuit and rockers to
reduce inventory
Diagnostics

Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.4

Product Selection

1

Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

1

Wiring
Master/Expansion Module
Wire Harness

Pin Numbers

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Master
VBATT
Common
CAN High
CAN Low
Common
LIN

Master = Black
Expansion = Gray

The interconnection between
master module and controller
uses a simple four-wire
harness. Addressing of the
master can be done by
software or via address claim
process. Interconnect wiring
between master-expansion
as well as expansionexpansion uses a three-wire
harness.

1

Mating Connector Information
●
Mating connector: Deutsch
plug DT06-6S
●
Wedge lock: W6S
●
Socket contact:
0462-201-16141
(1.0–0.5 mm2 [16–20 AWG]
●
Hole plug: 0413-217-1605

1
1
1
1
1
1

Expansion
VBATT
Common
LIN
LIN
Common
VBATT

1
1
1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

E33 eSM Specifications

1

Description

Specification

Operating temperature

–40° to 85°C

Storage temperature

–40° to 95°C

Operating voltage

9–32 Vdc

Environmental sealing

IP68

Mechanical shock

30g for 11 ms

Mechanical vibration

MIL-STD-202F/201A 2.0g random

1
1
1
1

Immunity to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances

1

Communication
Master

SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b

Expansion

LIN 2.0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-15

1.4
1
1
1
1
1
1

Electronic Products
E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Standard Cut-Out

Serviceability

The modules are easily
mounted with plastic retention
clips. Modules are mounted in
a single, space-saving cutout
reducing assembly time and
accommodating up to three
switches in a compact design.

By modifying the standard
cut-out to include the optional
front panel removable slots
shown below, the modules
are easily serviceable from
the front of the panel without
further disassembly.

1

Standard Cut-Out

1

4X
0.13
(3.3)

1
1
1
1

Optional Panel Opening Features
2X 0.80
(20.4)

2.80 (71.1)

60º
4X

2X 1.83
(46.4)

2X 0.17
(4.3)

Optional
Keying
Feature

Recommended Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.04–0.16 (1.0–4.0)

4X 0.17
(4.3)

E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units
0.65 (16.4)

1

2.91 (74.0)

1
1

1.44 1.70
(36.5) (43.2)

1.87
(47.4)

1
1
1
1

1.75
(44.4)

1

1.12
(28.4) Max.

1
1

1.73 Depth with
(44.0) Mating
Connector

E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units (Palm Guard Version)

1
0.83 (21.1)

1
1

1.89
(48.1)

1
1
1

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

V11-T1-16

2X 0.50
(1.3)

1.45
(36.8)

1
1

Due to the E33’s design
allowing for late-point
definition on assembly, both
the actuator and circuit profile
are serviceable as individual
components.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

2X 1.70
(43.2)

Optional Front
Removal Slots 4X

1.5

Electronic Products
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

Contents

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1

Description
eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Description

Application Description

Features

With a focus on communications, convenience and
safety, Eaton is pleased to
introduce eVU.

Typical applications for
information display include:

Communication and
Networking

Designed for Easy
Installation

1

eVU displays can interface
with smart engines,
controllers and equipment
software via established
J1939 and J1708
communication protocols.

Some advancements in
technology create installation
obstacles. That isn’t the case
with eVU. The displays fit into
the same cutouts as standard
Eaton NGR rocker switches,
0.866 x 1.732 in (22.00 x
44.00 mm), making
installation easy.
The simplified architecture
not only saves dash space,
it also saves costs.

1

●
●

Rugged dashpanel displays
simplify the viewing,
selecting and inputting of
key equipment/trip data.
Working in sync with existing
controllers and networks, the
displays provide the driver
with valuable feedback on
vehicle status and
performance.
eVU displays offer a great
deal of flexibility which can
include:
●
Internal warning/
alert buzzer
●
Backlighted legend
displays
●
Sunlight readable
LCD characters
●
Internal power supply
●
Analog or discrete switch
inputs
●
Up to 2.5 digit character
display
●
8-segment bar graph
●
Individual LED control
So, what’s the e for?
Easy, electronic and
evolutionary. eVU fills
the gap (literally) between
on-board systems and
displays, ideal for applicationspecific functions.

●
●
●
●
●
●

Temperature
Pressure
Speed
Distance
Capacity
Transmission
Warnings/alarms
System information

Safety
eVU displays are easier
to access than typical
touch screens or soft-key
applications. Keeping the
dashboard displays within
the driver’s line of vision
helps keep the driver and
everyone else on the road
safe. Additionally, the eVU
displays are designed to
meet SAE-1455 specification.
What Do You Want to View?
There are many types of
eVU displays and they can
be customized with various
colors, resolutions and
character configurations.
Choose the functionality
you want with the flexibility
you need.

In addition, eVU displays
can receive input from
analog transducers and
sub-systems. Analog inputs
can be either 0–20 mA or
0–10V. Additional input
options exist for up to six
logic states.

1
1
1
1
1
1

Product Selection
Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales
Representative.

1
1
1

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

Mounting Instructions

1

Product is designed to mount in panels between 1 to 4 mm
(0.039 to 0.157 in) thick.

1

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1

26.0 [1.02]

2.7 [0.11]
44.04
[1.734]

50.0
[1.97]

22.02
[0.867]

50.0
[1.97]

1
1
1
1

Panel Opening
21.5 [0.85]

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

1
V11-T1-17

Rockers
NGR

2.1

Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2

SVR

2.4

2.6

2.7

2.10

2.12

V11-T2-54
V11-T2-55

V11-T2-62
V11-T2-63

V11-T2-65
V11-T2-66

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V11-T2-69
V11-T2-70

V11-T2-72
V11-T2-73
V11-T2-74

2
2
2
2
2

V11-T2-76

V11-T2-78
V11-T2-79

Symbol Library
NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Only Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

V11-T2-68

Technical Data
Rocker, Toggle and Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocker Switch Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.14

V11-T2-48

Accessories
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.13

V11-T2-47

8064/8065 ESPORT
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESPORT

V11-T2-44

X Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.11

V11-T2-43

8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EURO SR

V11-T2-42

8006/8007—EURO SR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9

V11-T2-41

Rockette
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8

V11-T2-34

1600/2600
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rockette

V11-T2-32

1500/2500
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2

Dual Motion Safety Switch
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5

V11-T2-8
V11-T2-10

SVR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2

NGR
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3

V11-T2-3

V11-T2-80
V11-T2-85
V11-T2-95

V11-T2-1

2
2
2
2
2
2

2.1
2

Rockers
Introduction

Rocker Switch Products

Contents
Description

2

Rocker Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Motion Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated . . . . . . . . . .
8006/8007—EURO SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8004/8005—Euro Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8064/8065—ESPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-3
V11-T2-8
V11-T2-32
V11-T2-41
V11-T2-43
V11-T2-47
V11-T2-54
V11-T2-62
V11-T2-65
V11-T2-68
V11-T2-72
V11-T2-76
V11-T2-78
V11-T2-80

Rockers
Introduction

2.1

Rocker Selection Guide
See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated

2

NGR

SVR

2
2
2
2
2
2

Features
Ratings

15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac;
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)

12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc

2

Certifications

RoHS, UL® Approvable

RoHS, UL Approvable

2

Panel Opening

Rectangular

Octagonal

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.30 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)

✔
—
✔

✔
✔
✔

—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—

2

✔
✔

✔
✔

2

✔
✔
—

✔
✔
—

✔
—
—
—

✔
—
—
—

—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-10

Page V11-T2-34

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-16

Page V11-T2-36

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-17

Page V11-T2-37

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-30

Page V11-T2-38

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-80

Page V11-T2-80

Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width

2
2

Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel

2
2

Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label

2
2

Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four

2
2

Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs

2
2

Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-3

2.1
2
2

Rockers
Introduction

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
Dual Motion Safety Switch

1500/2500

Ratings

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac

Certifications

UL, CSA®, RoHS

UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS

Panel Opening

Octagonal

Rectangular

1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)
0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.20 mm)
N/A

1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
✔
✔
—
—
—

—
✔
✔
—
—
—

—
✔

—
✔

✔
—
—

✔
✔
—

✔
✔
✔
—

✔
✔
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-42

Page V11-T2-44

Technical Data

—

Page V11-T2-46

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Features

Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED

Circuit Diagrams

—

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-42

Page V11-T2-46

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

—

Page V11-T2-53

2
V11-T2-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Introduction

2.1

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
1600/2600

2

Rockette

2
2
2
2
2
2

Features
Ratings

Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac

Up to 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Certifications

UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS

UL, CSA, RoHS

Panel Opening

Rectangular

Octagonal

1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm)
0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm)
0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)

1.450 in (36.83 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)

—
—
—

✔
—
—

—
✔
✔
—
—
—

—
✔
—
—
—
—

—
✔

—
✔

✔
✔
—

—
✔
✔

✔
✔
—
—

✔
✔
✔
—

✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
—
—

Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width

2
2
2
2

Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel

2

Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label

2
2
2

Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print

2
2

Poles
Single
Double
Four

2
2

Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs

2
2

Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-48

Page V11-T2-55

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-52

Page V11-T2-58

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-78

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-52

Page V11-T2-58

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-53

—

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-5

2.1
2
2

Rockers
Introduction

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.
Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
8006/8007

8004/8005

Ratings

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc

Certifications

UL(CUR), RoHS

UL(CUR), RoHS

Panel Opening

Octagonal

Rectangular

1.450 in (36.85 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)
0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

✔
—
—

✔
—
—

—
✔
✔
✔
—
—

—
✔
—
✔
—
✔

—
✔

—
✔

✔
✔
—

✔
✔
—

✔
✔
✔
—

✔
✔
✔
—

—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—

—
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-63

Page V11-T2-66

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-64

Page V11-T2-67

2

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-78

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-64

Page V11-T2-67

2

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

—

—

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Features

Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width
Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel
Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label
Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print
Poles
Single
Double
Four
Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs
Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED

2
V11-T2-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Introduction

2.1

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued
X Series

2

8064/8065

2
2
2
2
Features
Ratings

16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac,
3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up
to 15A at 28 Vdc

Certifications

UL(CUR); RoHS, T85

UL(CUR); RoHS

2
2

Rectangular

Rectangular

2

1.46 in (37.00 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)
0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)
0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

2

✔
—
—

—
—
—

—
✔
—
—
—
—

—
✔
✔
—
—
✔

✔
—

—
✔

✔
✔
—

✔
✔
—

2

✔
✔
✔
—

✔
—
—
—

2

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-69

Page V11-T2-73

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-70

Page V11-T2-74

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-70 (Light Diagrams)

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-71

Page V11-T2-75

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-70

Page V11-T2-74

Panel Opening
Single- and two-pole length
Single-pole width
Two-pole width

2

Seal
Top (internal)
Bottom (internal)
Panel

2
2

Actuator
Rocker without bezel
Rocker with bezel
Paddle
Snap-in lens
Locking
Label

2
2
2

Decorative
Laser-etch
Pad-print

2

Poles
Single
Double
Four

2

Termination
Spade
Solder
Screw
Weld lugs

2

Illumination
Incandescent 6 Vdc
Incandescent 12 Vdc
Incandescent 14 Vdc
Incandescent 18 Vdc
Incandescent 24 Vdc
Incandescent 28 Vdc
Neon 110V
Neon 125V
Neon 250V
14V LED
28V LED
125V LED
277V LED

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-7

2.2
2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Contents

NGR Rocker Switches

Description

2

Page

NGR Rocker Switches
Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocker Buttons/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lens Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps .
NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2
2

V11-T2-10
V11-T2-11
V11-T2-13
V11-T2-14
V11-T2-15
V11-T2-16
V11-T2-17
V11-T2-30

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Features

Eaton presents its NGR
Rocker Switches. This fieldproven line of full-sized rocker
switches, initially developed
for the heavy truck industry,
is now found in a variety of
vehicle-related applications.

Sealing
Standard switch provides
splash and dust resistance
to IP42. The sealed version is
sealed to IP67 when supplied
with panel seal.
●

Rocker
The standard actuator for the
NGR is a clean, Europeanstyled, two-face rocker made
of high-quality thermoplastic
material. The rocker is
replaceable and snaps on and
off the switch. Both the
rocker and the bezel are
supplied with an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish.
Different colors are also
available, but black is
standard. Rockers can be
ordered separately.
●

The NGR offers both
European styling and
ergonomic design while still
providing the solid durability
that you have come to expect
from Eaton switches.
Illuminated and nonilluminated versions with
either incandescent bulbs or
LEDs are available in either
dependent or independent
circuits and in a variety of
popular switching circuits.

Lighting
Each switch is capable of
accommodating two
incandescent light bulbs or
LEDs for lighting purposes.
A lamp or LED can be located
at either end of the switch
and oriented to be circuit
dependent or independent.
The incandescent bulbs are
front replaceable. Two lamp
or LED voltages, 14 Vdc and
28 Vdc, are standard. For
additional voltages or colors,
consult your local Eaton Sales
Representative.
●

The NGR also offers a variety
of rocker buttons and
indicators with laser-etched
or pad-printed icons,
insertable lenses and
adhesive-backed labels.

2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

●

Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
RoHS Compliant 1

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Options
●

Circuits
●
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST
and 2PDT
●
Maintained and
momentary action

●

●

●
●

●

●

●
●
●

●

●
●

●

Common lamp ground
jumper for dual lamp units
Multiple LEDs for daylight
readability
Additional colors of
rockers, mounting bezels
and lenses are available
Special circuits
Special ratings
Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
Special lamps and lamp
voltages
Dry circuit capabilities
Custom back-lit legends
available
Reversing jumpers
(internal)

●
●

●
●

Gang mounting system,
see Page V11-T2-77
Locking rocker with locking
feature in UP and/or
DOWN positions
Indicators with laseretched or insertable
lenses, or adhesive labels
IP67 rated sealed switch
Polarized lock-on
connectors, see
Page V11-T2-76
●
28-5637-2 for Packard
terminals
●
28-5940 for AMP
terminals
Panel plug 17-21543
Replacement bulb catalog
number
●
14V: 28-5901
●
28V: 28-5909

For more information on
additional options, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.

2.2

Legends

Flexible Ordering System

Two legend areas are
provided on the ends of each
rocker of sufficient size to
accommodate two lines
consisting of four Helvetica
Narrow 12-point characters.
Legends may be nonilluminated or illuminated.
The NGR offers three styles
of illuminated legends.

You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.
Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Page V11-T2-10, to denote
assembly instructions.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Single-piece back-lit—Backlighting is a high-quality
automotive/truck industry
technique. The legend can
appear daylight white or
dead-front when nonilluminated but, depending
on the back-lit color chosen,
will change color when
illuminated. Examples of
standard back-lit legends are
found on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Snap-in lenses—This rocker
will have either one or two
snap-in lenses in the legend
areas. Legends are typically
pad-printed on the lens in
black or white. Snap-in lenses
are available in six standard
colors and can be ordered
separately.

2
2
2
2

Label rocker—This rocker
has a one-piece adhesivebacked label inserted into
a recessed area on the
face of the button. Legends
can be done in several
colors and be illuminated or
non-illuminated. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for suggested
sources.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-9

2.2
2

Rocker and
Paddle Frame

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Full Palm Guard

Switch Base

Panel Seal and
Internal Seal

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

To order rocker and switch base assembled, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order indicator caps, see Page V11-T2-15. For a complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.

Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Switch Base
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2

Example:
Switch Series
(Unsealed)
NGR = Switch base

Circuit 1
1501 = Circuit
See Pages V11-T2-17
to V11-T2-29.

2
2

NGR

Frame Style
1 = Rocker and paddle
frame
2 = Palm guard (top)
3 = Palm guard (bottom)
4 = Full palm guard
(top/bottom)
S = Panel seal and
internal seal
G = Locking rocker 2
D = Locking rocker 3
F = Locking rocker 4
T = Internal seal

1501
Frame Color

B = Black

Switch
Contact Plating 5
N = Standard
T = High rated
G = Gold

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

4

B N

A

0

“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

N
“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6
C = 28V LED/red 8
D = 28V LED/green 8
E = 28V LED/amber 8
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red 7
L = 28V LED/green 7
T = 28V LED/amber 7
W = 28V LED/white 7
X = 28V LED/blue 7
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Notes
1 Circuits show lighting options available. See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29.
2 Locks in DOWN position.
3 Locks in UP and DOWN positions.
4 Locks in UP position.
5 Switch contact construction plating—
N = Standard: Recommended for use on loads up to 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
T = High Rated: Recommended for use on loads greater than 12 amps at 14 Vdc.
G = Gold: Recommended for use on dry circuit/low level switching.
6 Replaceable.
7 Replaceable/wedge base LED.
8 PCB version LED.

2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rocker
Assembled
N = No

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Face
Rocker,
No Lens

Two-Face
Rocker,
Snap-In Lens

Rocker Buttons/Actuators

Decorative Decorative
Rocker,
Paddle,
Back-Lit
Back-Lit

Locking
Rocker

2

Label
Rocker

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Rocker Buttons/Actuators

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate button type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Rocker Button Type
1 = Two-face, no lens rocker
2 = Two-face, snap-in lens rocker
3 = Decorative rocker, back-lit
4 = Decorative paddle, back-lit
5 = Locking rocker
6 = Label rocker

Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” only
B = “B” only
C = “A” and “B”
D = No icon/lens/hole

3

C

AF

A 1

B

AE

C

4

A 3

Icon “A” Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “B” Code
AE = Lock
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “A” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation

Icon “B” Orientation
A = Standard orientation
B = 90° clockwise
C = 180° clockwise
D = 270° clockwise
0 = No icon; no orientation

Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Indicator
Stripe Location
1 = “A” Position
2 = “B” Position
3 = “A” and “B” Positions
0 = No stripe

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 Decorative rocker only.
2 Two-face rocker only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-11

2.2
2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Icon Location Examples

Icon Orientation Examples

Location A

Location C

Orientation A

Orientation C

Rocker with Icon in
“A” Position (Code A)

Rocker with Icon in
“C” Position (Code C)

Rocker with Standard
Orientation (Code A)

Rocker with Icon at
180° Clockwise (Code C)

Location B

Orientation B

Orientation D

Rocker with Icon in
“B” Position (Code B)

Rocker with Icon at
90° Clockwise (Code B)

Rocker with Icon at
270° Clockwise (Code D)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Translucent Lens

Transparent Lens

2.2

Lens Selection

2

For NGR Rocker Type “2” and Indicator Type “2CAP” only.

2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Translucent Lenses 12
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White 4

Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-2
28-5863
28-5863-3
28-5863-9
28-5863-8

28-5863-2

AF

2

A

2

Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise

Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

How To Order—Transparent Lenses 12
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:
Lens
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear 4

Base
Catalog Number
28-5863-5
28-5863-4
28-5863-6
28-5863-10
28-5863-7

28-5863-5

AF

Icon Code
AF = Unlock
See Symbols Library
on Pages V11-T2-80 to
V11-T2-94.

A

2
2
2

Orientation Style Code
A = Standard orientation
B = Rotated 90° clockwise
C = Inverted 180°
D = Rotated 270° clockwise

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1
When ordering a lens with an icon for the code B (bottom) position, specify code C orientation.
2
Standard lens type.
3
Non-standard lens type.
4
Standard pad print for white and clear lens is black.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
2
V11-T2-13

2.2
2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps

Complete Indicator and
Indicator Cap Assembled

To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Complete Indicator
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Example:
Indicator Type
2N = Two-face, snap-in lens
3N = Laser-etched
6N = Label

2N C

AA R

Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole

1

B

AB

Icon “A” Code
AA = Horn
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 = No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

A 0

A
Icon “B” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Lamp/LED Type and Color
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 28 Vdc incand./clear
0 = No lamp/LED
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
B = Green
C = Amber
E = Blue
F = White
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 Decorative rocker only.
2 Two-face rocker only.

2
2
V11-T2-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Indicator Base

2.2

NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps

Indicator Cap

2

To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11.
To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.
To order complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Indicator Base
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

NGRIND A

“A” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Switch Series (Unsealed)
NGRIND = Indicator base

0

2

N

“B” Lamp
Type and Color
0 = No lamp
A = 14 Vdc incand./clear
B = 24 Vdc incand./clear
R = 14V LED/red
G = 14V LED/green
Y = 14V LED/amber
K = 28V LED/red
L = 28V LED/green
T = 28V LED/amber
X = 28V LED/blue
H = 14V LED/high intensity red
J = 14V LED/high intensity green
P = 14V LED/high intensity amber
M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

2

Rocker
Assembled

2

N = No

2
2
2
2
2
2

How To Order—Indicator Cap
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Indicator Type
2CAP = Two-face,
snap-in lens
3CAP = Decorative/
laser-etched
6CAP = Label

2

2CAP

Icon/Lens/Hole Location
A = “A” icon only
B = “B” icon only
C = “A” and “B” icons
D = No icon/lens/hole

C

AB 1 B
Icon “A” Code
AB = Battery
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

AH

0

A

2
2

Icon “B” Code
AH = Fuel
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “A” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color
0 = No icon; no color
1 = Daylight white 1
2 = Deadfront 1
3 = White 2
4 = Black 2
5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
E = Blue
A = Red
F = White
B = Green
G = Clear
C = Amber
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted
Color or Lens Color
A = Red
E = Blue
B = Green
F = White
C = Amber
G = Clear
0 = Non-lighted or no lens

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1
Decorative rocker only.
2
Two-face rocker only.

2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-15

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

NGR Rocker Switches

2
2
2
2

Description
Ratings

1

Specification
15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac
15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)
Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications

Contact material—
Standard construction

Movable—copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button
Stationary—silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button

Mechanical life

250,000 operations, minimum

2

Electrical life

200,000 operations, minimum

Terminal type

Standard 0.25 in (6.35 mm) spade, silver-plated copper alloy

2

Base material

High-grade thermoplastic molding material

Dielectric

1000V rms, minimum

2

Mounting means

Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

2

Mounting hole

Rectangular panel cutout 1.734 x 0.867 in (44 x 22 mm)

Panel thickness

0.040 to 0.156 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) 2 3

2
2
2
2

IP rating

Standard IP42; sealed option IP67

Operating temperature
range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Notes
1 For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
2 Best results obtained between 0.060 and 0.118 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm).
3 On sealed versions, recommended panel thickness between 0.079 and 0.118 in (2.0 and 3.0 mm).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-16

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Standard Circuit Diagrams
Single-Pole

2

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1001

OFF
9

UP
Position

ON

2001
9

4

1 6
2B

7

8

9

10

1501

—

OFF
3

8

9

10

1502

—

OFF

NONE

—

5B

—

OFF
9

NONE

2B

1504

—

OFF
9

NONE

ON

5B

7

8

9

10

1505

—

OFF

2B

7

8

9

10

1506

—

OFF

NONE

2B

7

1507

—

NONE

9

10

9

—

1508

—

NONE

2B

10

9

—
8

—

2B-3

2
2
2
2
2

NONE

ON

—

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

OFF

NONE

ON

2

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

OFF

NONE

ON

2

—

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON

—

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON

—

—

2B-3-9-1
5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

2
2
2

2

10

5B

2

OFF

4

1 6
2B

7

2B-3-9
5B-6

8

3

5B

5B

2508

4

1 6

—

10

2B-3-9-10

ON

—

4

1 6

7

OFF
9

5B

2507

8

ON

8

3

5B

7

NONE

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6

2B

8

2506

10

9

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

OFF

2
2

4

1 6

7

OFF

3

10

2B

8

2B

9

2505

3

—

5B

5B
8

2B-3-9

ON

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6

7

4

1 6

3

10

3

—

5B

2B

9

2504

2B-3

ON

5B
8

4

1 6

3

NONE

—

10

3

—

—

4

1 6

7

4

ON

8

2B-3

10
1 6

5B

2503

8

NONE

4

1 6

9

—

5B

2B

10

3

7

3

9

2502

10

2B

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

OFF

4

1 6

7

1503

3

10

2B

8

2B

9

2501

3

7

3

8

2B-3-9

ON

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

ON

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

3

—

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6
2B

NONE

CENTER
Position

10
3

—

5B

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

7

NONE

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

8

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-17

2.2
2
2
2
2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

1002

OFF
9

8

9

10

OFF
3

8

9

10

1522

OFF

8

9

10

1523

OFF

2

1524

2

2

OFF

8

9

10

OFF

MOM. ON

—

NONE

—

7

8

9

10

OFF

2

3

8

9

10

2523

—

NONE

8

9

10

2524

—

NONE

8

9

10

2525

8

—

5B

7

8

9

10

2526

5B

7

8

9

10

2528

5B
8

2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-18

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

—

—

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6
2B

7

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6
2B

2B-3

—

4

1 6
2B

3

—

5B

5B

7

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

—

4

1 6
2B

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6
2B

7

NONE

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

NONE

4

1 6
2B

3

—

5B

1528

2

NONE

2B-3-10

4

1 6
2B

10

3

—

5B

7

3

9

4

1 6

1526

2

—

10

2B

8

2522

8

9

2

MOM. ON

5B

7

3

—

5B

1525

2

NONE

OFF

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6

3

10

2B-3-9

10

7

2
2

OFF
9

2B

9

2521

8

3

8

3

—

5B

7

2

—

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

MOM. ON

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

3

—

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6
2B

NONE

CENTER
Position

10

3

—

5B

7

3

—

4

1 6
2B

2
2

2002
3

7

2
2

MOM. ON

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9

—

5B

1521

2

NONE

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10
3

2
2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
ON

ON

2003

2B-1
8

9

10

1541

ON

5B
8

9

10

1542

ON

8

9

10

1543

ON

NONE

2B-3-9

ON

—

NONE

2B

7

1544

—

ON

2B-1

—

2B-3

ON

NONE

ON

9

2544

7

2545

10

9

4

1 6

2B-1

5B
8

9

10

1546

ON

ON

7

8

9

10

1547

ON

—

NONE

2B

10

—

1548
9

7

8

9

10

2547

2B-3-9

NONE

ON

10

2548
9

2B-1
8

5B
8

—

ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

ON

NONE

ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

2

ON

NONE

ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-3

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2

4

1 6
2B

7

2

2

10
3

5B

NONE

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6

5B

7

ON

ON

4

1 6
2B

8

2B

9

2546

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

2

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B

NONE

2B-3-9

4

1 6

3

—

2B-3
5B-6

10
3

7

2B

8

3

1545

5B

7

NONE

—

4

1 6
2B

8

3

10

2B

5B

7

2B

9

2543

10

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3

ON

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6

9

9

2B

10

2B

8

3

9

2542

3

2B-1

5B

5B
8

2B-3-10

ON

ON

4

1 6

7

4

1 6
2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2541

4

1 6
2B

—

5B
8

3

2B-1

7

3

ON

2B
7

4

1 6
2B

NONE

2B-3

2

NONE

4

1 6

2

ON

10

3

—

UP
Position

4

5B

7

CENTER
Position

10
3

8

2B

9

4

1 6

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

7

NONE

UP
Position

1
6

9

CENTER
Position

5B

1003

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

5B
8

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-19

2.2
2
2
2
2

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …

1004

ON
9

2
2

8

9

10

ON
3

8

9

10

1562

ON

8

9

10

1563

ON

2

10

ON

8

9

10

ON

7

8

9

10

ON
3

2

8

9

10

1567

ON
3

2
2

8

9

10

1568

ON
3

7

2

OFF

2B-3-10

ON

—

OFF

—

OFF

8

9

10

2563

—

OFF

—

OFF

8

9

10

2564

—

OFF

8

9

10

2565
1 6
2B

8

—

8

9

10

2566
1 6
2B

8

9

10

2567
1 6
2B

8

9

10

2568
1 6
2B

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

4
5B
8

2
2
V11-T2-20

ON

4
5B

7

7

2B-3
5B-6

4
5B

7

2B-3

—

4
5B

7

3

2B-1

5B

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6
2B

2B-3-10

ON

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

ON

4

1 6
2B

2B-3

ON

5B

7

2B-3

ON

OFF

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6
2B

10

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2

9

2562

4

1 6
2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

2

—

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

ON

ON

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1

5B

1566

2

OFF

2B-3-9

4

1 6
2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2561

4

1 6

1565

2

2

9

1564

2
2

8

2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

—

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

ON

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6
2B

OFF

CENTER
Position

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

—

4

1 6
2B

2

2004
3

7

2

ON

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9

2B-1

5B

1561

2

OFF

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10
3

2

2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1005

MOM. ON
9

UP
Position

MOM. ON

2005

2B-1

7

8

9

10

1581

MOM. ON
3

5B
8

9

10

1582

MOM. ON

8

9

10

1583

MOM. ON

OFF

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

—

OFF

1584
9

—

9

2B-3

OFF

MOM. ON

—

OFF

2584

5B
8

9

10

1586

MOM. ON

2585

OFF

MOM. ON

7

8

9

10

1587

MOM. ON

—

OFF

2B

9

10

2586

—

1588

7

8

9

10

2B-3-9

OFF

MOM. ON

10

8

9

2B-1
8

—

2B-3

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

2

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

5B
8

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2

4

1 6
2B

7

MOM. ON

10
3

5B

5B

2588

4

1 6

OFF

4

1 6
2B

7

MOM. ON
9

5B

2587

8

MOM. ON

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2B

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

2

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B-3
5B-6

10

2B-3-9

4

1 6

5B
8

3

—

—

10

9

2B-1

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6
2B

10

7

5B
8

2B-3

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6

3

10

7

MOM. ON

2B

9

9

2B-1

1585

3

8

2583

8

2B

7

3

5B

7

5B

2

OFF

4

1 6
2B

10

3

10

4

1 6

2B

9

2582

7

MOM. ON

3

8

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

5B

7

2

MOM. ON

4

1 6
2B

8

2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2581

4

1 6
2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

—

5B

2B
7

4

1 6
2B

MOM. ON

UP
Position

4

1 6

3

2B-1

7

3

OFF

2B-3

4

1 6
2B

—

CENTER
Position

10
3

5B

2B

9

4

1 6

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

7

CENTER
Position

OFF

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-21

2.2
2
2
2
2

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …

1006

ON
9

2
2

8

9

10

ON
3

8

9

10

1602

ON

8

9

10

1603

ON

2

10

ON

8

9

10

ON

7

8

9

10

ON
3

2

8

9

10

1607

ON
3

2
2

8

9

10

1608

ON
3

7

2

OFF

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

—

OFF

—

OFF

8

9

10

2603

—

OFF

—

OFF

8

9

10

2604

—

OFF

8

9

10

2605

8

—

5B

7

8

9

10

2606

5B

7

8

9

10

2607

5B

7

8

9

10

2608

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6
2B

5B
8

2
2
V11-T2-22

ON

4

1 6
2B

7

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6
2B

2B-3

—

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1

5B

5B

7

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6
2B

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6
2B

2B-3

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

OFF

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6
2B

10

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2

9

2602

4

1 6
2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

2

—

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

MOM. ON

ON

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1

5B

1606

2

OFF

2B-3-9

4

1 6
2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2601

4

1 6

1605

2

2

9

1604

2
2

8

2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

—

5B

7

4

1 6
2B

MOM. ON

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6
2B

OFF

CENTER
Position

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

—

4

1 6
2B

2

2006
3

7

2

MOM. ON

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9

2B-1

5B

1601

2

OFF

UP
Position

4

1 6
2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10
3

2

2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
1007

ON
9

CENTER
Position

NONE

UP
Position

MOM ON

1 6

2007
9

2B-1

—

2B-3

2B

8

ON
9

NONE

MOM ON

1

9

5B

—

2B-3-9

1622

ON

NONE

MOM ON

1 6

3

5B

7

—

2B-3-10

2B

8

ON
9

NONE

MOM ON

2623
9
3

2B-1

5B

2B-3

NONE

MOM ON

9

2B

2B-1

5B

—

2B-3

2B

8

ON
9

NONE

MOM ON

1 6

2B

—

2B-3-9

1626

ON

NONE

MOM ON

3

1 6

2B
7

3

2B-1

—

2B-3-10

1627

ON

NONE

MOM ON

8

1

6

2B

3

4

2B-1-10

5B

7

—

2B-3-9

8

1628
9

NONE

MOM ON

2B

1 6

2B-1

—

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

2

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-3
7

2B

8

2B-1
5B-4

—

2B-3
5B-6

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2

4
5B

2

2

10
1 6

3

8

8

2628

4
5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

4
5B

9

10
3

1 6

2B

7

ON

—

10

9
3

7

5B

2627

9

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6

2B

7

8

2

10

9

4
5B

8

2626

10

MOM ON

4
5B

2B

7

8

NONE

10
1 6

3

2B-1

9

8

9

4
5B

7

5B

2625

10
3

ON

4

7

1625

2

10
1 6

3

4

6

8

2624

10
1

2B-3
5B-6

4
5B

7

ON
3

1 6

2B

8

1624
9

—

—

10

4

6

1

7

7

8

10

2B

2B-1
5B-4

4
5B

7

1623
3

1 6

3

2B-1

MOM ON

10

9

4

2B

8

2622

10

9

5B

2

NONE

4

2B

7

8

1 6

2

ON

10
3

2B-1

2B

7

8

4

6

5B

2621

10

UP
Position

4

7

1621
3

1 6

3

5B

CENTER
Position

10

4

2B

7

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-23

2.2
2
2
2
2

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …

3003

OFF
9
3

2

OFF

2

2

1 6

OFF
9
1 6

OFF
9
3

1 6

ON

2A-2B

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF
9
3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF
9
3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF
9
3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF
9
3

1 6

ON

ON

5A 8

2A-2B

5A
8

9

10

3567
1 6
2A
2B

5A
8

9

10

3568
1 6
2A
2B
7

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1-10
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

4
5A

5B
8

2
2
V11-T2-24

OFF

4

5B

7

2B-3

2B-3
5B-6

4

5B

7

3

2A-1

1 6
2A

2B

4

2A
5B

10

2B-3-9

10

2B

9

3566

5A 8

3548

5A
8

3

2A-1-10

2A-2B
5A-5B

4

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

1 6
2A

4

2A
7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3565

5A 8

3547

5A
8

3

2A-1

2A-1
5A-4

4

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

1 6
2A

4

2A
7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3564

5A 8

3546

5A
8

3

2A-1

ON

4

5B

7

2B-3

ON

1 6
2A

4

2A
7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3563

5A 8

3545

5A
8

3

2A-1

ON

4

5B

7

2B-3

ON

1 6
2A

2B

4

2A
7

10

2B-3-10

10

2B

9

3562

5A 8

3544

2

ON

5A
8

3

2A-1
5B

7

7

2A-2B

OFF

4

5B

7

4

2A

2

ON

10
3

2

ON

1 6
2A

2B

5A 8

3543

2B

10

3

2A-1
5B

9

4

2A
7

8

2B-3-9

8

OFF

2
2

5A

2A-2B

5A

3561

10
3

2

ON

UP
Position

4

5B

7

3

2A-1
5B

2B

2

2B

4

9

2
2

1 6
2A

2B

3542

2

ON

1 6
2A

2B-3

CENTER
Position

10
3

2A-2B

10
3

2

3004

5A 8

9

2

ON

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

4

3541

2

ON

UP
Position

9

2A-1
5B

7

2

2

1 6
2A

7

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10

2B

2

2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
5001

ON
9

UP
Position

OFF

1 6

5510

2B

9

4

2B-1

5B
8

9

10

5501

ON
3

1 6
2B

8

9

10

5502

ON

7

8

9

10

5503

ON

NONE

—

OFF

—

NONE

7

—

9

NONE

—

9

NONE

5514

8

9

10

5506

ON

NONE

7

8

9

10

5507

ON

—

NONE

2B

10

—

5508
9

7

8

9

10

5517

—

NONE

OFF

10

5518
9

2B-1
8

5B
8

—

—

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-9
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-10
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-9-10
5B-4

—

—

ON

NONE

OFF

5B
8

2B-1
5B-4

—

—

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

4

1 6
2B

7

2B-1-9
5B-4

10
3

5B

OFF

4

1 6
2B

4

1 6

5B

7

ON

NONE

4

1 6
2B

8

2B

9

5516

3

2B-1-9-10

5B

7

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7

—

OFF

ON

2

2

10

—

OFF

—

4

1 6

3

2B-1-10

5B

2B

—

4

1 6

8

3

5B

5B

9

2B-1-9

—

10

5515

10

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6
2B

4

7

5B
8

—

OFF

OFF

4

1 6
2B

7

ON

3

10

9

2B-1

5505

2B

9

5513

8

3

8

3

5B

7

5B

7

—

OFF

NONE

4

1 6
2B

10

2B

10

4

1 6

1 6

9

7

ON

3

8

5512

8

5504

5B

2B
7

—

OFF

ON

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B

10

4

1 6

3

9

5511

3

2B-1-10

5B

2B

—

5B
8

4

1 6

3

OFF

2B
7

3

2B-1-9

5B

2B

NONE

UP
Position

10

—

4

7

3

—

CENTER
Position

4

1 6

3

7

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

7

CENTER
Position

NONE

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-25

2.2
2
2
2
2

Circuit with Rocker In …

5002

MOM. ON
3

2
2

9

10

8

9

10

5522

8

9

10

5523

2

9

10

8

9

10

8

9

10

9

10

5528

2

7

OFF

—

NONE

OFF

—

NONE

OFF

1 6

5B

1 6

5B

5547
1 6

5B

7

2A-2B

2B-3

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3-9

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3-10

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1-10

2A-2B

2B-3-9

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3

10
3

1 6

4

2A
2B

5B

5A 8

2
2
V11-T2-26

2A-1

5A 8

9

2

OFF

4

2A

7

ON

10

2B

2

ON

5A 8

5548

2

2B-3-10

4

2A

8

2A-2B

10

2B

—

2A-1

5A 8

5546

3

—

OFF

4

9

2B-1

ON

10

2B

—

ON

5A 8

2A

—

2B-3-9

4

5545

4
5B

5B

7

MOM. ON
1 6

1 6

2B

3

8

2B

NONE

2A-2B

10

2A

—

2A-1

5A 8

9

2B-1-10

5B

7

3

—

OFF

4

5544

4

1 6

5B

7

MOM. ON

2

OFF

3

5B

1 6

2B

9

2B-1-9

5526

2

NONE

ON

5A 8

2A

—

4

7

2B

—

ON

10

7

MOM. ON
1 6

5B

5543

3

7

3

OFF

2B-3

4

9

2B-1

5B

1 6

2B

4

1 6

2B

NONE

2A-2B

5A 8

2A

—

2A-1

10

7

MOM. ON

5525

2
2

8

5B

5542

3

5524

2

—

OFF

4

9

2B-1

5B

7

3

OFF

4

1 6

1 6

2B

7

MOM. ON

2B

NONE

ON

10

2A

—

ON

5A 8

5541

3

7

3

—

UP
Position

4

9

2B-1-10

5B

2B

OFF

4

1 6

5B

7

MOM. ON

3

NONE

3

7

2B

2B

9

2B-1-9

5B

1 6
2A

—

4

1 6

3

—

CENTER
Position

10

7

MOM. ON

2B

2

5003
3

8

3

2

OFF

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
9

2B-1

7

2

NONE

UP
Position

4
5B

5521

2

2

1 6
2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10

9

2

2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
3001

ON
9

UP
Position

ON

3002

2B

9

4

1 6

5B-4-2B-1

5B
8

9

10

3501

ON
3

1 6
2B

8

9

10

3502

ON
1 6

9

10

3503

ON
1 6

5B-4-2B-3-9

ON

5B-4-2B-3-10

ON

3504

ON
9

2B

5B-4-2B-3

ON

5B-4-2B-1

3505

ON
9

9

10

3506

ON
6

2B-3
5B-6
ON

5B-4-2B-3

9

10

3507

ON
1 6

ON

ON

5B-4-2B-3

2B

ON

ON

5B-4-2B-3

ON

5B-4-2B-3-9

8

ON
9

ON

ON

ON

1 6
2B

9

10
1 6
2B

5B-4-2B-3

2B-3
5B-6

7

8

9

10

3527
1 6
2B

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

2

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

2

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

8

3528

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

4
5B
8

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2

10
1 6

2

2

4
5B

7

7

OFF

4
5B

9

5B-4-2B-1
8

5B
8

3

5B

2

4

7

4

2B-3
5B-6

10
1 6

3526

2B-3-9
5B-6

10
3

8

3

5B-4-2B-1

3508

5B

2B

2B-3
5B-6

2B-3
5B-4

4

3525

2B-3
5B-6

2B-1
5B-4

10
1 6

7

4
5B

7

8

3524

2B-3
5B-6

2–ON

4
5B

7

3

5B-4-2B-1
8

2B

1 6
2B

4
5B

7

3

10

9

5B-4-2B-1
8

1

9

3

5B

2B

8

4

7

3

7

2

1–ON

4
5B

3523

10

2B

1 6

3

5B

1 6

10

9

8

3

9

2B

10

2B

8

3522

2B-3-10
5B-6
ON

5B

2

OFF

4

7

4

7

1 6

3

5B-4-2B-1
8

1 6

10

4
5B

7

3

9

3521

2B-3-9
5B-6
ON

5B
8

3

5B-4-2B-1
8

2B

2B
7

4
5B

7

3

ON

UP
Position

4

1 6

3

5B-4-2B-1

5B

2B

ON

2B-3
5B-6

4

7

3

5B-4-2B-3

CENTER
Position

10
3

7

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10
3

7

CENTER
Position

ON

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-27

2.2
2
2
2
2

Circuit with Rocker In …

3005

MOM. ON
9

2

9

10

2

7

8

9

10

7

8

9

10

3583

2B

9

10

3584

8

9

10

8

9

10

3586

8

9

10

3587
3

2
2

1 6
2B

9

10

3588
1 6
2B
7

2

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

1 6
2B

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3-10
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3-9
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3-10
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

2B-1-10
5B-6

2B-3-9
5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

8

9

10

4502
1 6
2B

8

9

10

4503
1 6
2B

8

2B-1
5B-6

2B-3
5B-6

8

9

10

4504
1 6
2B

8

9

10

4505
1 6
2B

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1-10
5B-4

2B-1-10
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1
5B-4

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

4
5B

7

8

9

10

4506
1 6
2B

4
5B

7

8

9

10

4507
1 6
2B

4
5B

7

8

9

10

4508
1 6
2B

4
5B
8

2
2
V11-T2-28

2B-1
5B-4

4
5B

7

7

MOM. ON

4
5B

7

3

2B-1
5B-4

ON

4
5B

7

4
5B

NONE

4
5B

7

3

8

3

2B-3-9
5B-6

4
5B

7

2

2B-1
5B-6

3

5B

7

2

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6
2B

10

3

5B

7

3

9

4501

4

1 6
2B

MOM. ON

8

3

5B

7

3

ON

UP
Position

4
5B

7

4

1 6

3585

2
2

8

2B

MOM. ON

1 6
2B

3

5B

7

3

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6

3

2B-1
5B-6

CENTER
Position

10

3

5B

2B

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6

3

2

9

3

5B

3582

2

4001

4

1 6
2B

2

MOM. ON

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

3

8

3

2

ON

UP
Position

4
5B

7

2
2

6

3581

2

2

1
2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER
Position

10
3

2

2

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole
Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)
5004

ON
3

1 6
2A

ON

UP
Position

OFF

5005

5B

2B

8

9

10

5561
3

1 6
2A

4
5A
8

7

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

5562

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

3

1 6
2A

4
5A

7

8

9

10

5563
3

1 6
2A

4
5A

7

8

9

10

5564
3

1 6
2A

4
5A

7

8

9

10

5565
3

1 6
2A

4
5A

7

8

5566
3

1 6
2A

4
5A

7

7

8

9

10

5567
3

1 6
2A

4
5A

5582

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2B

7

8

9

10

5568
3

1 6
2A

2B

5B
8

5583
9

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-10
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

4
5A

2A-1-10
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

8

2A-1
5A-4

2A-2B
5A-5B

5B

2B
7

8

9

10

5584

5B

7

8

9

10

5585

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3
5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-4

2B-3-10
5B-6

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1-10
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1
5B-4

2B-3
5B-4

2B-3-9
5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

4

1 6
2B

5B

7

8

5586
10
4

1 6
2B

5B

7

8

9

10

5587
4

1 6
2B

5B

7

8

9

10

5588
1

6

2B

4
5B

7

8

6001
9

2B-3
5B-6

4

1 6
2B

2B-3
5B-6

2B-3
5B-4

10

3

5B

2B-1
5B-4

4

1 6

9

2A-1
5A-4

OFF

10

7

6

7 3

4

1

5A

2A

5B

2B

10

8

2

1–ON

4

1 6

3

5B

2B

8

3

5B

2B

5B

2

2–ON

4

1 6
2B

10

9

10

3

5B

2B

9

5581

3

5B

2B

8

3

5B

2B

5B

9

2A-1
5A-4

UP
Position

4

7

3

5B

2B

1 6
2B

10

9

CENTER
Position

10

3

5B

2B

9
3

5A

DOWN
Position

Schematic
Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

4

7

7

CENTER
Position

10

9

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2A-2B-5A-5B- —
10-1-4-3

3-6-1

2

2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-29

2.2
2
2

NGR Rocker Switches

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Switch Base with Rocker Button
1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)

2

0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)

2
2

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25) 0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)
Decorative
Rocker

LEGEND
AREA “A”

2
2

LEGEND
AREA “B”

LEGEND
AREA “A”

SIL Rocker
(Snap-In Lens)

0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)

2
2

Orientation
Examples of “Standard”
Orientation of Icons

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

2
2

Terminals
8 and 10

0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)

2
2

ROAD
LAMP

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

2
2

Terminals
7 and 9

Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.039 to 0.157 in
(1.00 to 4.00) mm
(Best results
obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in
[1.50 and 3.00 mm])

LEGEND
AREA “B”

2

Rockers

0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)

On Indicator “A”
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)

2

1.024 ± .010
(26.01 ± 0.25)

On Indicator “B”

A
B
C

0.500 ± 0.010
(12.70 ± 0.25)

0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)

2

0.054 ± 0.005
(1.37 ± 0.13)

2
2

1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)

2

0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)

2
2

0.250 ± 0.005
(6.35 ± 0.13)

2

0.462 ± 0.005
(11.73 ± 0.13)

0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)
0.523 ± 0.005
(13.28 ± 0.13)

0.144 ± 0.005
(3.66 ± 0.13)

2

7

5A 5B

6

5B

USA

9

0.667 ± 0.005
(16.94 ± 0.13)

2
V11-T2-30

2A 2B

10

2

1

2B

2A

9

3

1

2

8

7

5A

2

8
6

4

2

4

0.855 ± 0.010
(21.72 ± 0.25)

3

10

0.257 ± 0.005
(6.53 ± 0.13)

0.401 ± 0.005
(10.19 ± 0.13)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers
NGR Rocker Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Locking Rocker

2

Sealed Rocker

0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)

A

2

B
C

0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)

0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)

2

0.420 ± 0.005
(10.67 ± 0.13)

2
2

0.060 ± 0.010
(1.52 ± 0.25)
Panel Seal

1.450 ± 0.040
(36.83 ± 1.02)

1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)

2

0.345 ± 0.010
(8.76 ± 0.25)

B
C

A

2
2

0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)

0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)

2
2

0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)

0.320 ± 0.005 Max.
(8.13 ± 0.13 Max.)
0.245 ± 0.005
(6.22 ± 0.13)

2

LEGEND
AREA “B”

0.500 ± 0.005 Max.
(12.70 ± 0.13 Max.)

LEGEND
AREA “A”

LEGEND
AREA “B”

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.0 ± 0.25)

2

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

2
2

Indicator

2

Label Rocker
Surface Length Along Bottom

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

2

0.375 ± 0.010
(9.53 ± 0.25)

LEGEND
AREA “B”

0.500 Max.
(12.70 Max.)

LEGEND
AREA “A”

1.128 ± 0.010
(28.65 ± 0.25)

0.320 Max.
(8.13 Max.)

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)

0.580 ± 0.008
(14.73 ± 0.020)

2
2

0.470 ± 0.010
(11.94 ± 0.25)

2
2

R0.060 ± 0.005
(R1.52 ± 0.13)

0.095 ± 0.005
(2.42 ± 0.13)

2

0.020 ± 0.005
(5.08 ± 0.13)

2

12° ± 1°
0.100 ± 0.005
(2.54 ± 0.13)
Rotated 12° CCW
Graphics Window

1.800 Max.
(45.42 Max.)

Note: Graphics window may be on both ends or either end of part.
Dimensions shown are typical.

0.408 ± 0.010
(10.36 ± 0.25)

2
2
2
2

0.0305/0.032
(0.775/0.813)

2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-31

2.3
2

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Contents

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker

Description

2

Page

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers
Above Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Below Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2

V11-T2-34
V11-T2-35
V11-T2-36
V11-T2-37
V11-T2-38

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description
The Sealed Vehicle Rocker
(SVR) switch from Eaton’s
electrical business now offers
an above panel actuator style
in addition to the below panel
and paddle actuators.
Designed to meet the severe
environmental requirements
of the construction and
agricultural vehicle markets,
the SVR is sealed at the front
and back of the switch and
meets the rigorous sealing
requirements of IP68.
The small switch footprint
minimizes the space taken
on switch panels. SVR
switches are assembled into
panels by pressing the switch
through the top of the panel
and are held in place by
retention tabs molded into
the body of the switch;
mounting hardware or special
tools are not necessary.

Features
The SVR is offered in singleand two-pole switch circuits,
with two- and three-position
momentary and maintained
circuits available. Switch
and illumination circuits are
terminated with 0.11 in
(2.8 mm) tin-plated copper
alloy spade terminals. The
SVR connector can be
loaded with the appropriate
terminals and/or wire seals
to accomplish sealing at the
back end of the switch.

You can order assembled
switches or the switch base
and actuator separately.

Actuator Styles
●

Use the final code in the
switch base catalog number,
Pages V11-T2-34 and
V11-T2-35, to denote
assembly instructions.

Actuator

●

The SVR switch family
includes three styles of
actuators: above panel,
below panel and paddle.
Switch performance and
specifications are the same
for all actuator styles. Black is
standard, but other colors are
also available. Matte finish
is standard on all actuator
styles, matching the finish on
the bezels and all other visible
SVR switch features and
accessories.

●

Above panel rocker button
offers new styling and a
larger surface area. Eaton
can offer assistance with
unique designs of above
panel actuators for
applications where
differentiation is desired
Below panel rocker button
is the same two-faced
European styling that has
been offered for SVR since
its initial release. Indicator
style matches the below
panel rocker button style
Paddle actuator allows
toggle-type actuation of
the SVR switch

Standards and
Certifications

2

●

2

●

2
●

2

Approvable under stringent
UL and CSA standards
For information, contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative
RoHS Compliant 1

2
Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
2
V11-T2-32

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Illumination

Snap-in Lenses

Long life LEDs provide
backlighting illumination for
the SVR switch. Backlighting
can be either independent of
or dependent on the switch
circuits, or a combination of
both. Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. LED
protection circuitry is
available to protect the LED
from overvoltage and reverse
voltage conditions.

●

Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about standard and custom
circuit options.

Backlighting
●

●

●

●

Each switch can
accommodate up to two
LEDs that can be
connected to be either
circuit dependent or
independent
Standard LED color is
amber, with red, green and
blue also available. Long
life (100,000 hours) LEDs
are standard
Standard LED voltages are
12 and 24 Vdc
The below panel rocker
button style includes a
single-piece back-lit
actuator with laser-etched
icons in either daylight
white or deadfront styles.
Without illumination, the
icon is either daylight
white or deadfront, but
will change to the color of
the chosen light source
when illuminated

Above and below panel
rocker buttons are available
with or without one or two
translucent lenses. Five
standard lens colors are
available: white, red,
green, blue and amber

Icons
●

Icon areas are provided
on each end of the rocker
button. Icons may be
illuminated or nonilluminated and are padprinted in a contrasting
color either directly on the
rocker button or the lens

Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting using four
flexible plastic retainers
integral with switch frame.

Circuits
The SVR switch is capable of
single- or two-pole
configurations with two- or
three-position maintained,
momentary or a combination
of actuations.
The addition of jumpers
between switch terminals
expands the circuit
possibilities.

Standard Circuit Options
ON–NONE–ON
●
ON–OFF–ON
●
ON*–OFF–ON*
●
ON*–OFF–ON
●
ON–ON–ON
●
ON*–NONE–ON
●
ON*–ON–ON*
●
ON*–ON–ON
●

Options
●

●
●
●

●
●

Note: * = Momentary. See
Electrical Circuit Diagrams on
Page V11-T2-37.

Sealing
SVR design includes a sealed
contact chamber with dust
and water resistance to IP68.
The harness connection can
also be sealed by using AMP
wire seals Catalog Number
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
or 828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
to seal the wires to the
connector. For an application
where a connector cavity is
not being used, it can be
sealed with AMP sealing plug
Catalog Number 828922-1.
The above panel version
may also be sealed to the
panel using panel seal
Catalog Number 32-2245.

2.3

●

●

●

●

●

●

Additional colors of
actuators, mounting bezels
and lenses
Special circuits
Special ratings
Pad printing on the below
panel switch bezel
Low current capabilities
Custom back-lit icons
Gang-mount system
including end bezel Catalog
Number 17-22146 and
center bezel 17-22152
Palm Guard (below panel
switch only) at either or
both ends of the switch
frame
Indicators with insertable
lenses
Polarized lock-on
connector Catalog
Number 25-13936
Panel plug with connector
retention feature Catalog
Number 17-22145
Non-illuminated below
panel paddle actuator

Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
additional information on options.

Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
more specific information
about SVR standard and
custom circuit options.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-33

2.3

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Above Panel Rocker Switch

2
2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Above Panel Rocker Switch

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

2
2

S

AC

Switch Series

M

2X

D

G AT

R

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

M = Standard

Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
2nd Digit (Illumination)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
A = ON–NONE–ON
D = Bottom/right (D)
1
C = ON–NONE–ON
E = Top/left (I)
D = ON–OFF–ON
F = Bottom/right (I)
1
E = ON–OFF–ON
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
H = ON*–OFF–ON
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1
J = ON*–OFF–ON
Two-Pole Illumination
K = ON–ON–ON 2
R = None
L = ON–ON–ON 12
S = Top/left (D)
M = ON*–NONE–ON
T = Bottom/right (D)
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
U = Top/left (I)
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
V = Bottom/right (I)
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
T = ON*–ON–ON
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)

1st Digit (Circuit)

KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.

2
2

LED Wavelengths:
Red =
~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm

2
2
2

LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X = None
14V Standard
J = Red
K = Green
L = Amber (standard)
M = Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 = Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 = Blue
28V Standard
E = Red
F = Green
G = Amber (standard)
H = Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 = Red
5 = Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 = Blue

LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.

2

X

Frame

S = SVR

2
2

AC
C=
D=
E=
F=

Actuator Style
No lens
Top/left lens only
Bottom/right lens only
Top/left and
Bottom/right lenses

Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White

Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
R = Red
G = Green
B = Blue
A = Amber
W = White

Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

Notes
1 Gold plated.
2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.

2
2
2
V11-T2-34

X

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.

Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2.3

Below Panel Rocker Switch

2
2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Below Panel Rocker Switch
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

S

AC

S

2X

Switch Series
S=
T=
B=
F=

S = SVR

Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits
2nd Digit (Illumination)
1st Digit (Circuit)
Single-Pole Illumination
A = None
C = Top/left (D)
A = ON–NONE–ON
D = Bottom/right (D)
C = ON–NONE–ON 1
E = Top/left (I)
D = ON–OFF–ON
F = Bottom/right (I)
E = ON–OFF–ON 1
G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
F = ON*–OFF–ON*
H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1
J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
H = ON*–OFF–ON
K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
J = ON*–OFF–ON 1
Two-Pole Illumination
K = ON–ON–ON 2
R = None
L = ON–ON–ON 12
S = Top/left (D)
M = ON*–NONE–ON
T = Bottom/right (D)
P = ON*–NONE–ON 1
U = Top/left (I)
R = ON*–ON–ON* 2
V = Bottom/right (I)
S = ON*–ON–ON* 12
W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I)
T = ON*–ON–ON
Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D)
U = ON*–ON–ON 1
3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D)
4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)
1st and 2nd Digit Indicators
NE = 7–9 Illumination
NF = 8–10 Illumination
NK = Dual Illumination
N9 = Dual Illumination with 8–9 jumper
KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.

3

G AT

R AC

Frame
Standard—Below panel
Palm Guard—Top/left
Palm Guard—Bottom/right
Palm Guard—Full

LED (Top/Left)
1st Digit
X = None
14V Standard
J = Red
K = Green
L = Amber (standard)
M = Blue
14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
1 = Red
2 = Green
3 = Amber (standard)
7 = Blue
28V Standard
E = Red
F = Green
G = Amber (standard)
H = Blue
28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection
4 = Red
5 = Green
6 = Amber (standard)
8 = Blue

LED (Bottom/Right)
2nd Digit
X = None
Same codes available as 1st digit.
LED Wavelengths:
Red =
~630 Nm
Amber = ~592 Nm
Green = ~526 Nm
Blue = ~472 Nm

X X

Actuator Style
1 = No lens
2 = Top/left lens only
3 = Bottom/right lens only
4 = Top/left and bottom/right lenses
5 = Paddle—No lens
6 = Indicator—Top/left lens
7 = Indicator—Bottom/right lens
8 = Indicator—Top/left and Bottom/
right lens
9 = Indicator—No lens
A = Decorative rocker

2
Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.

Special Feature
X = None
For Eaton use only.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Lens Color (Top/Left)
X = None
B = Blue
R = Red
A = Amber
G = Green
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront

2
2
2
2

Icon (Top/Left)
XX = None
AT = Work light
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

2
2
2

Lens Color (Bottom/Right)
X = None
B = Blue
R = Red
A = Amber
G = Green
W = White
Decorative Icon Color
1 = Daylight white
2 = Deadfront

2
2
2
2

Icon (Bottom/Right)
XX = None
AC = Fast
See Symbols Library on Pages
V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and
V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

2
2
2

Notes
1
Gold plated.
2
Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2

2
V11-T2-35

2.3

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker

2
2

Description

Specification

Ratings

12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc, can be approved under stringent UL and CSA standards

Electrical life
Standard plating

2

50,000 operations at 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc. Life cycle testing conducted using both inductive and
resistive loads

Gold plating

250,000 (maintained circuits)/50,000 (momentary circuits) operations
at 10 mA at either 12 or 24 Vdc

2

Mechanical life

2
2
2
2
2

Maintained circuits

250,000 operations minimum

Momentary circuits

50,000 operations minimum

Circuits

Single- or two-pole, two- or three-position, with momentary and
maintained capabilities

Dielectric strength

1500 volts rms minimum

Operate force

1–3 lbs (4.4–13.2 Nm) depending on circuit configuration and actuator style

Temperature
Operating range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Storage range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Contact material

2

Movable
Stationary

Silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface

2

Gold-plated

Contacts are available for low level electrical loads

2
2
2
2
2
2

Copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface

Terminal type

Standard 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminal
Mates to AMP Junior Power Timer Terminals 1
Catalog Number 927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
Catalog Number 927770-3 (18–20 gauge)

Plastic component UL ratings
Base material

UL 94 V-O

Frame material

UL 94 H-B

IP rating

IP68

Sub-actuator material

UL 94 V-O

Actuator material

UL 94 V-0 (above panel rocker button)
UL 94 H-B (below panel rocker button and paddle actuator)

Mounting hole

Standard panel cutout of 1.45 x 0.83 in (36.8 x 21.1 mm)

2

Panel thickness

0.04 to 0.16 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm)
Best results obtained between 0.06 and 0.12 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm)

2

Note
1 See also Sealing, Page V11-T2-33, for additional AMP components to seal the connector interface.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-36

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.3

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Circuit Diagrams

2

Switch Circuit Schematics

Code
A
C (Gold)

7
2
5

3

2–3

4

7
2

3

9

1
6
4

8
7
2
5

3

NONE

—

BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated
ON

Code
A
C (Gold)

2–3

9

5

OFF

—

ON

D
E (Gold)

MOM. ON

OFF

2

3

9

1
6
4

5

2

5

—

F
G (Gold)

4

3

4

2

5

3

2–3

OFF

—

ON

H
J (Gold)

4
10

7
2

2–1

5

3

K
L (Gold)

4
10

7
2

Two-pole only
5

3

7
2

3

9

NONE

ON

M
P (Gold)

4
10

7
2

1
6
4

5

MOM. ON

2–3

—

2–1

5

10

8

3

R
S (Gold)

4
10

7
2

Two-pole only
5

3

7
2

3

9

MOM. ON

ON

ON

T
U (Gold)

4

9

7
2

5

2–3

6
4
10

2–1

5
8

BOTTOM/
RIGHT
Actuated

2
2

ON

NONE

ON

2–3
5–6

—
—

2–1
5–4

2

ON

OFF

ON

2

2–3
5–6

—
—

2–1
5–4

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2–3
5–6

—
—

2–1
5–4

2

MOM. ON

OFF

ON

2

2–3
5–6

—
—

2–1
5–4

ON

ON

ON

2–3
5–6

5–4–2–3

5–4–2–1

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

2–3
5–6

—
—

2–1
5–4

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2–3
5–6

5–4–2–3

5–4–2–1

2

MOM. ON

ON

ON

2

2–3
5–6

2–1
5–4

2–1
5–4

2

2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2

3
1
6

2–1

CENTER

2
2

10

1

8

9

1
6

8

T
U (Gold)

9

1
6

8

R
S (Gold)

9

1
6

8

M
P (Gold)

9

1
6

8

K
L (Gold)

9

1
6

8

MOM. ON

9

10

7

2–1

10

8

1
6
10

7

2–1

MOM. ON

9

1
6

10

7

2

3

8

2–3

4

7

8

ON

TOP/
LEFT
Actuated

Two-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)

2–1

10

1
6

8

H
J (Gold)

ON

CENTER

10

5

F
G (Gold)

9

1
6

8

D
E (Gold)

TOP/
LEFT
Actuated

Single-Pole Schematic
(Shown in Top/left
Actuated Position)

4
10

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-37

2.3
2
2
2

Dimensions

SinglePole
Code

Above Panel Rocker

TwoPole
Code

Schematic 1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A

R

None

Above Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator

C

S

2
D

T

2
2

E

U

2
2
2

F

V

2
2

G

W

2
H

Y

J

3

2
K

4

2
2
2

Illumination
Code
9

2
2
2
2
2

8

10

7
+

0.945 ± 0.010
(24.00 ± 0.25)
0.400 ± 0.010
(10.16 ± 0.25)

9

10
+

7
+

9

8

10

7
+

9

8

10
+

7
+

9
3

7
+

1.870 ± 0.010
(47.50 ± 0.25)

0.300 ± 0.010
(7.62 ± 0.25)

3

8

ICON
AREA
T/L

ICON
AREA
B/R

0.052 ± 0.010
(1.32 ± 0.25)

Top/Left
Actuated
Center
Bottom/Right
Actuated

0.807 ± 0.010
(20.50 ± 0.25)

1.418 ± 0.010
(36.00 ± 0.25)

10
+
9
3

Panel Seal Gasket (Above Only)

Panel Opening (Above and Below)

8

10
+

7
+

9
3
1

8

10
+

7
+

9

8

10
+

Schematic 1
7
+

9

8

10
+

1.450
(36.80)
1.700 ± 0.010
(43.18 ± 0.25)

1.190
(30.20)

1.450 ± 0.010
(36.83 ± 0.25)

0.812 ± 0.010
(20.62 ± 0.25)

1.190 ± 0.010
(30.23 ± 0.25)
0.680
(17.30)

0.830
(21.10)

0.680 ± 0.010
(17.27 ± 0.25)

R0.060 ± 0.010
(R1.52 ± 0.25)
0.950 ± 0.010
(24.13 ± 0.25)

Note: Recommended panel thickness
0.039–0.157 in (1.00–4.00 mm).
Best results obtained between
0.059 and 0.118 in (1.50 and 3.00 mm).

Note
1
LED for terminals 7–9 is at
top/left side of switch.
LED for terminals 8–10 is at
bottom/right of switch.

2
V11-T2-38

1.299 ± 0.010
(33.00 ± 0.25)

0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)

Catalog Number 32-2245

2
2

9
3

8

2
2

7
+

1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)

2
2

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Illumination Schematics

2
2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2.3

Below Panel Rocker

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Below Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator
0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)

2
ICON
AREA
T/L

0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)

0.446 ± 0.010
(11.40 ± 0.25)

2

1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

2

ICON
AREA
B/R

2

Top/Left Actuated
Center
Bottom/Right
Actuated

2
2
2

0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)

1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

2
0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)

1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)

Panel Actuator (Below Panel Only)

2

1.610 ± 0.010
(40.89 ± 0.25)

2

Panel Guard (Below Panel Only)

2

0.940 ± 0.010
(23.88 ± 0.25)

0.551 ± 0.010
(14.00 ± 0.25)

0.102 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)

1.054 ± 0.010
(26.78 ± 0.25)

2
2
2

1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)

2
2

0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)

2

Indicator (Below Panel Only)
0.390 ± 0.005
(9.90 ± 0.13)

0.270 ± 0.005
(6.90 ± 0.13)

0.100 ± 0.010
(2.60 ± 0.25)

2
2

ICON
AREA
T/L

ICON
AREA
B/R

2

1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

2
2

0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)

2
2
2

1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

2
2

1.400 ± 0.010
(35.60 ± 0.25)

0.810 ± 0.010
(20.60 ± 0.25)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-39

2.3
2

Rockers
SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Gang Mount System

2

End Bezel Catalog Number 17-22146
Center Bezel Catalog Number 17-22152

2

0.820 ± 0.005
(20.88 ± 0.13)

2.020 ± 0.010
(51.37 ± 0.25)

1.020 ± 0.010
(25.96 ± 0.25)

2
2

1.770 ± 0.010
(44.88 ± 0.25)

2

1.530 ± 0.010
(38.90 ± 0.25)

2

1.450 ± 0.005
(36.80 ± 0.13)

2.050 ± 0.010
(52.00 ± 0.25)

2
2

2 End Bezels

2

1.976 ± 0.010
(50.20 ± 0.25)

2 End Bezels and 1 Center Bezel

0.640 ± 0.010
(16.36 ± 0.25)

3.000 ± 0.010
(76.20 ± 0.25)

0.150 ± 0.010
(3.75 ± 0.25)

2

1.070 ± 0.010
(27.10 ± 0.25)

2
2

Panel Opening
for 2-End Bezel

1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)

Panel Opening
for 2-End and 1
Center Bezel

1.545 ± 0.010
(39.24 ± 0.25)
0.540 ± 0.010
(13.64 ± 0.25)

2
2
2
2

1.000 ± 0.010
(25.51 ± 0.25)
2-End Bezel

2 Ends and 1 Center Bezel

Panel Plug

Connector

Catalog Number 17-22145

Catalog Number 25-13936

2
2

AMP Terminal Catalog Numbers:
927766-3 (14–16 gauge)
927770-3 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Wire Seal Catalog Numbers:
828905-1 (14–16 gauge)
828904-1 (18–20 gauge)
AMP Sealing Plug Catalog Number:
828922-1

0.980 ± 0.010
(25.00 ± 0.25)

2
1.730 ± 0.010
(44.00 ± 0.25)

2
2

0.660 ± 0.010
(16.80 ± 0.25)

1.310 ± 0.010
(33.40 ± 0.25)

0.100 ± 0.010
(2.55 ± 0.25)

1.240 ± 0.010
(31.50 ± 0.25)

2

0.580 ± 0.010
(14.75 ± 0.25)

2
2

1.730 ± 0.010
(43.95 ± 0.25)

2

0.330 ± 0.010
(8.40 ± 0.25)

2

1.400 ± 0.010
(35.56 ± 0.25)

2

0.810 ± 0.010
(20.57 ± 0.25)

2
V11-T2-40

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.020 ± 0.010
(26.00 ± 0.25)

Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches

2.4

Contents

Dual Motion Safety Switch

Description
Dual Motion Safety Switches
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

2

V11-T2-42
V11-T2-42

2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Application Description

Eaton's Vehicle Control
business offers these
new dual motion safety
switches to prevent
accidental actuation and
protect operator personnel
and equipment.

●
●

●

●
●

These rockers are available in
two standard circuit options:
OFF (locked)—None—ON and
ON (locked)—None—ON. The
locked safety feature requires
two motions from the
operator to place the actuator
in the unlocked position. In
the locked position, the
operator must apply pressure
on the actuator forward and
an additional force in an
upward motion for the switch
to be moved to the unlocked
position. Once in the
unlocked position, the
switch can easily be moved
back into the locked position.

Farming equipment
Fire trucks and safety
vehicles
Lawn and garden
equipment
Large transportation buses
Industrial and commercial
equipment

Features and Benefits
Dual motion safety switches
are recommended up to
15A at 28 Vdc. An added
benefit is its IP54 seal level.
They can be used in tough
environments where there
may be exposure to small
dust particles or water
splashing against the
enclosure from any direction.
For available higher ratings
or additional customizable
circuits, please contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.

Options
There are many options to
choose when building the
right switch for your
application. Termination
types to choose from include
screw type, solder lug and
0.250-inch spade terminals.
Actuators are available in four
standard colors with an
appealing matte finish.
Choose from black, red,
white or yellow. Eaton also
offers standard and
customizable legend pad
printing options on top of the
actuator. There is even an
option for arrows to be pad
printed on the sides of the
rocker to indicate the correct
forward motion.

2

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL/CSA Recognition at
15A, 125 Vac;
10A, 250 Vac;
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
RoHS Compliant 1

2
2
2
2

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
2
2
2
2
2

For added convenience,
the bezel is designed to
allow an easy snap-in switch
mount into various panel
thicknesses. The actuators
even have ergonomic
grooves to help provide the
operator a firm grip when
moving the actuator.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-41

2.4
2

Rockers
Dual Motion Safety Switches

Catalog Number Selection

8179K21Z T 51 AA A Y

2
2
2

Poles
and Throws

Circuit with Rocker In …
Position A Center Position Position B
OFF (lock)
None
ON
ON (lock)
None
ON

2PST
2PDT

Base
Part Number

Side Arrow
Pad Prints
X = None
Y = Both sides

8179K21Z
8179K22Z

2
2

Rocker Color
Y = Black
T = Red
M = White
E = Yellow

2
2
2

Available Switch Pad Prints

2

Prints 2

Termination Type
50 = Screw type
51 = Solder lug
52 = Quick connect
(0.250 in spade)

Top Pad Print 1
XX = None
AA = PTO
AB = Creeper engage
AC = Retarder
AD = Windrower ON/OFF
AE = Rotary lock pin cylinder

A=
B=
C=
D=
X=

Icon Orientation
Standard
90° clockwise
180° clockwise
270° counterclockwise
None

2
2
PTO

Creeper Engage

Retarder

Windrower
ON/OFF

2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Dual Motion Safety Switch

2

0.957
(24.40)

2

0.648
(16.50)

0.102
(2.60)

2

PAD
PRINT
ICON

0.800 ± 0.010
(20.30 ± 0.25)

B
“A” ± 0.03

A

2

0.410 ± 0.010
(10.40 ± 0.25)

2
2

1.155
(29.30)

Pad Print Arrows on Side of Rocker

2
2

1.190 (30.20)

Recommended Panel Opening
Thickness 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained from
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)

Notes
1 Black pad print color for white and yellow rockers. White pad print color for red and black rockers.
2 Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more available pad print options.

V11-T2-42

1.450 (36.80)

0.680 (17.20)
0.830 (21.10)

0.276
(0.07)

2
2

1.548
(39.30)

Push rocker in direction of arrow
to actuate from “A” to “B” position.
“A” position = locked,
“B” position = unlocked.

0.669
(0.17)

6

2

1.844
(46.8)

2

2

2

3
0.170
(4.32)

1

2

0.250 (6.35)
(0.032 [0.80] Thick)

1

2

0.825
(20.90)

0.096 (2.40)

5

2

Dimensions

4

2

Rotary Lock
Pin Cylinder

3

2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.427
(36.20)

Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2.5

Contents

1500/2500 Series

Description

Page

1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . .
Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-44
V11-T2-45
V11-T2-46
V11-T2-46

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Options

Eaton’s 1500/2500 series
rocker switch offers a
designer touch that will
enhance any product line.

High Inrush Option

Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications
and medical and office
equipment. Custom legends
are available on the switch
actuator and bezel.

The 1500H/2500H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.

This two-color rocker version
brightly indicates the ON
position. This version spares
the expense of more costly
illuminated switches and is
available with the high inrush
option.

2

Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.

2

International Approvals
●
●

Hi-Lite Rocker with
High Inrush Option

2

Standards and
Certifications

●
●

2

UL Recognized
CSA Certified
ENEC
RoHS Compliant 1

2
2

EN
EC

2
2

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-43

2.5

Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate
code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Midsize Non-Illuminated
Example:

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V

2
2
2

Rating
UL/CSA:
15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC:
10(4)A 250V

2
2
2

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1504

6

1PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
ON

1506
1507

9
8

ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON

2500
2501
2505
2502
2503

10
11
12
13
15

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

2504

14

2PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
ON

2506
2507

17
16

2PST
2PDT

Example:

2
2

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

1PDT

E

038

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON

1PST

1

Circuit
Number 3
1
3
4
5
7

Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs
Note: B style terminal not offered
for 1506 Series.

Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular Legends
table on Page V11-T2-53.

How To Order—Midsize Illuminated

2
2

2

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number 2
1500
OFF
1501
OFF
1505
MOM. OFF
ON
1502
MOM. ON
1503

Poles
and
Throw

Rating

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

1500

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

2500

1PST

ON
MOM. ON

NONE
NONE

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1500
OFF
1501

2PST

ON
MOM. ON

NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF

Poles
and
Throw

2500
2501

G

2 2

E

725

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
3

18
21
28
30

Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 4
5 = 12V filament 4

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs

Notes
1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 #1500—#1507 switches are supplied in 1500 type base. #2500—#2507 switches are supplied in 2500 type base.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

V11-T2-44

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2.5

Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option

1500H

Example:

Poles
and
Throw

Rating
UL/CSA:15A 125 Vac,
10A 250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(4)A 250V
UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

1PST

1PST

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position

ON
MOM. ON

ON

NONE
NONE

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
OFF

NONE

1 2

1500 _
1501 _

OFF

1500H

E

2

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Circuit
Number
3

1
3

2

4

1

Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Hi-Lite Color
1 = Black
5 = Gray
2 = White
6 = Red
4 = Green
7 = Yellow

Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs 4

Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

2
2
2

Example:

Poles
and
Throw

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position

1500H

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number

1

2 E

2

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.
Circuit
Number
3

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

1500H

1

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

2500H

10

Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect

Example:

Poles
and
Throw

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Pos.
Position

2500H

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

1500H

18

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

2500H

28

2
2
2

725

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to Base Circuit Number.

2

G

2 2

E

Circuit
Number
3

2

2

How To Order—High Inrush Illuminated

Rating
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

2

2

How To Order—High Inrush, Non-Illuminated

Rating
UL/CSA:
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT, 1 hp
125-250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

2

Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)

Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon

Base and Bezel
Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Legend Type
(Optional)
725 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

2
2
2
2
2

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/
0.25 in quick
connect

2

Notes
1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #2. 1500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 High inrush capabilities available only on basic catalog numbers beginning with 1500H.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 Standard rating only.
5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
2
2
V11-T2-45

2.5

Rockers
1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated
Description

Specification

Description

Specification

2

Ratings

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-44 and V11-T2-45.

Mechanical life

50,000 cycles minimum

Seal level

IP40

Insulation resistance

50M ohms minimum

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

2

Circuits
Standard

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, maintained and momentary

Terminal types

2

High inrush option

1PST, 2PST, maintained

Standard

6.3 mm Tabs/0.250 in Quick Connect

Hi-lite option

1PST, maintained

Optional

Solder lug

2

Contact mechanism
Standard

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Common (center)

2

High inrush option

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break

End

Copper

Make—High inrush option

100A peak inrush at 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles minimum

Lamp

Brass

Break—High inrush option

16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles minimum

Mounting

See dimensions below

Contact material

Silver inlay over copper

32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)

2

Operating temperature
range

Contact resistance

10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc

2

Dimensions

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

2
2

Termination material

1500/1500H Type Base
0.287 (7.30)
Max.

Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)

1.248
(31.70)
Max.

2

0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)

Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick

0.595 (15.11)
Max.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.
0.380 ± 0.002.0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

2

0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)

0.756
(19.20)
Nom.

0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)

0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)

1.070
(27.18)
Max.

0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)

0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)

0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

Panel Opening
Panel Thickness: 0.031–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

2500/2500H Type Base
0.287 (7.30)
Max.

2
2

Copper fine silver-plated

1.248
(31.70)
Max.

Matte Finish Bezel
Matte Finish Rocker
(Non-Illuminated)
Translucent Rocker
(Illuminated)

0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)

1.028 (26.11)
Max.

2
2

Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50)
Nom.

2

0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.011
0.756
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)
(19.20)
Nom.
Code “B” Alternative
Solder Lug Only

2
2

Combination
Quick Connect/
Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.325 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.815 ± 0.02) Thick

0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05) 0.422 ± 0.003
(10.73 ± 0.08)
0.982 ± 0.011
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)
Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.

1.070 (27.18)
Max.

0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)

1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)

1.026 ± 0.002
(26.05 ± 0.05)
0.327 (8.31)
Nom.

Panel Opening
Panel Thickness:
0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

0.658 ± 0.004
(16.712 ± 0.14)

0.868 ± 0.002
(22.05 ± 0.05)

2
V11-T2-46

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70)
Nom.
0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

Contents

1600/2600 Series

Description

Page

1600/2600—Midsize AC Only
Non-Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Splashguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Inrush Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-48
V11-T2-49
V11-T2-50
V11-T2-51
V11-T2-52
V11-T2-52
V11-T2-53
V11-T2-53

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Options

Eaton’s 1600/2600 series of
midsize snap-in rocker and
paddle switches have
worldwide approvals at up to
16A, 250 Vac. One switch
can be used for both
domestic and foreign
markets.

High Inrush Option

Ideal applications include
appliances, electronic
instrumentation, data
processing, communications,
medical equipment, office
equipment and many more.
A wide circuit variety is
offered in a choice of
standard and custom colors
for illuminated and nonilluminated versions. Custom
legends are available on the
switch lever and bezel. High
inrush and splashguard are
also available.

This version features a
uniquely designed seal that
resists moisture and water,
making it ideally suited for
marine, RV and food
processing applications.
The oversized nylon lever
with smooth, matte finish
features a convenient
thumb depression to
ensure effortless touch
control. Two-pole switches
feature both a thumb
depression and a convex
curve. See Page V11-T2-50.

The 1600H/2600H is
designed to handle high
inrush currents up to
100A peak inrush for
10 milliseconds.

2

Note: See Catalog Number
Selection for more detail.

2

International Approvals
●
●

Splashguard Option

2

Standards and
Certifications

●
●

2

UL Recognized
CSA Certified 1
ENEC
RoHS Compliant 2

2
2

EN
EC

2
2

Notes
1 Splashguard option is cRU marked only.
2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-47

2.6

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Non-Illuminated Rocker

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add
the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated Rocker
Example:

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Rating
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc,
8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V

Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

1600

M 2

OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON

Rocker
1600
1601
1605
1602
1603

Paddle 1
P1600
P1601
P1605
P1602
P1603

Circuit
Number
1
3
4
5
7

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1604

P1604

6

1PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
ON

1606
1607

P1606
P1607

9
8

ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF
ON
MOM. ON

2600
2601
2605
2602
2603

P2600
P2601
P2605
P2602
P2603

10
11
12
13
15

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

2604

P2604

14

2PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
ON

2606
2607

P2606
P2607

17
16

2PST
2PDT

3

Finish

4

Blank = Standard
M = Matte

Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Rocker/Paddle
Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

Notes
1 Paddles are UL, CSA only.
2 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 To order the standard, add a “dash” to the catalog number. Example: 1600–11E.

2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-48

E

038

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

Base Circuit Number
DOWN 2
Position

1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs

Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

2.6

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Illuminated Rocker
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Illuminated Rocker

2

Example:

1621 X

W 5

3

E

038

2

X = Independent lamp

Rating
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

ON
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON

NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1624X

4

1PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
ON

1626X
1627X

4

2PST

ON
MOM. ON
ON

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF
MOM. OFF

2600
2601
2605

28
30
31

—

Indicator

—

—

1609

32

Poles
and
Throw

1PST

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

DOWN 1
Position Base
Circuit
Number
1600
OFF
1601
OFF
1620X
OFF
1621X
OFF
1625X
MOM. OFF
ON
1622X
MOM. ON
1623X

1PDT
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
10A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 10(2)A 250V
UL/CSA:
16A 125–250 Vac,
10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
—

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

2

Circuit
Number
18
21
20
4

3

Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

4
4
4

4

Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 5
5 = 12V filament 5

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect
B = Solder lugs

Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3.
2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2 #1600—#1609 switches are supplied in 1600 type base.
#1620—#1627 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. (Must have an “X” code.)
#2600—#2605 switches are supplied in 2600 type base.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
4 All independent lamps for IP switches to be assembled from terminal positions #24 and #26.
5
6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-49

2.6

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Splashguard

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Splashguard 1
Example:

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Rating

Poles
and
Throw

2

1PST

16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac

1PDT

10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
16A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
10A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac

1PDT
2PST
2PDT
2PDT

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

NONE
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
NONE
NONE
NONE
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

DOWN
Position

ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

B1600

1

Base
Circuit
Number
B1600
B1601
B1602
B1604
B1606
B1607
B2600
B2601
B2602
B2604
B2606
B2607

Circuit
Number 3
1
2
5
6
9
8
10
11
13
14
17
16

Base Color
1 = Black

Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red
4 = Green
5 = Gray

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Splashguard

Ø 0.560
(14.22) (2)

17°

1.800
(45.72)

1.000
(25.40)

2

0.474 ± 0.001
(12.05 ± 0.05)

2
2

Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)

0.868 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)
Single-Pole

0.81 + 0.02/–0.01
(0.032) Thick

Two-Pole

1.026 ± 0.001
(26.05 ± 0.05)
0.424 + 0.003/–0.004
(10.75 + 0.11/–0.10)

0.758 ± 0.005
(19.26 ± 0.14)
1.070
(27.18)

0.888 ± 0.001
(22.05 ± 0.05)

2
2

Hole
Ø 0.106 nom.
(2.70)

0.500
(12.70)

0.249
(6.32 + 0.03/–0.02)
Wide

2
2

Terminal Type
E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect

Dimensions

2
2

E

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

2
2

2

0.876 ± 0.003
(22.25 ± 0.10)

0.483 ± 0.002
(12.27 ± 0.007)

1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)

Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)

1.075 ± 0.003
(27.30 ± 0.10)

Panel Opening

Notes
1 Splashguard is CUR marked, but does not have ENEC approval.
2 All circuits also recommended 10A, 28 Vdc.
3
See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.

2
2
V11-T2-50

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Panel
Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

High Inrush Rockers

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection
How To Order—Non-Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
Example:

Rating
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

Poles
and
Throw
1PST

2PST

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

ON
ON

ON

NONE
NONE

NONE

1600H

DOWN 2
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1600H
OFF
1620H 3

OFF

2600H

M 2

1

2

E 038

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

2

Circuit
Number
Finish

5

4

E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect

Base and
Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

10

2

Terminal Type

Blank = Standard
M = Matte

1
2

2
2

Legend Type (Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

2
2

Rocker Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

2
2

How To Order—Illuminated High Inrush Rockers
Example:

Rating
UL/CSA: 1
22A 125 Vac,
16A 250 Vac,
6A 125 VacL,
10A 14VT,
1 hp 125–250 Vac;
ENEC: 16(4)A 250V
—

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

1600H

1PST

ON
ON

NONE
NONE

DOWN 2
Position Base
Circuit
Number
OFF
1600H
OFF
1620HX 6

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

Poles
and
Throw

2600H

R

2

1

E

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
5

18
19

Lens/Rocker Color
A = Amber
G = Green
R = Red
W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color
1 = Black
2 = White
3 = Red

2
Legend Type
(Optional)
038 = ON/OFF
See Most Popular
Legends table on
Page V11-T2-53.

28
Terminal Type

—

Indicator

Indicator

—

1609

32

Lamp Voltage
0 = No lamp
1 = 125V neon
2 = 250V neon
4 = 6V filament 8
5 = 12V filament 8
6 = 24V filament 8

2
2
2
2

E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in
quick connect

2
2
2

Notes
1 UL, CSA: 1 hp at 125V or 250 Vac; 6A, 125 Vac (L) rating; 10A, 14 Vdc.
Marked on request only.
2 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #2.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
3 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H base.
4 No code required.
5 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
6 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H type base. (Must have “X” code.)
7 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #3.
1620H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26.
8 6V, 12V, 24V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-51

2.6
2
2
2
2
2

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Technical Data and Specifications
1600/2600—Midsize AC Rated
Description

Specification

Description

Specification

Ratings

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-48 to V11-T2-51.

Insulation resistance

100M ohms minimum

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Circuits
Standard

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT maintained and momentary

High inrush option

1PST, 2PST maintained

Terminal types

Contact mechanism

Standard

6.3 mm tabs/0.250 in quick connect

Optional

Solder lug

Standard

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

High inrush option

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break

Termination material
Common (center)

Copper fine silver-plated

2

Make—High inrush option

100A, 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles min.

End

Copper

Break—High inrush option

16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles min.

Lamp

2

Contact material

Silver inlay over copper

Mounting

See dimensions below

Contact resistance

10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc

Operating temperature range

32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)

2

Mechanical life

50,000 cycles minimum

2

Dimensions

2

1600/1600H Type Base

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

36°

Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick
0.279 ± 0.004
(7.10 ± 0.10)

0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)

2
2
2
2
2

Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.

1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)

Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

2600/2600H Type Base
1.197 (30.40)
Max.

0.024 ± 0.004
(0.60 ± 0.10)

36˚
0.287 (7.30)
Max.

18˚

1.023 ± 0.004
(26.00 ± 0.10)

2

0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)

0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)

Combination Quick
Connect/Solder Lug
Code “E”
0.249 ± 0.001
(6.33 ± 0.03) Wide
(0.032 ± 0.001
(0.82 ± 0.02) Thick

2

2

0.474 ± 0.002
(12.05 ± 0.05)
0.483 ± 0.003
(12.27 ± 0.07)

0.756 (19.20) Nom.

2

2

Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.

0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)

0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)

2

2

1.070
(27.18)
Max.

0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

2
2

0.042 ± 0.002
(2.05 ± 0.05)

0.982 ± 0.010
(24.95 ± 0.30)
0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

2
2

18°

0.287 (7.30)
Max.

2
2

Brass

0.622 ± 0.007
(15.80 ± 0.20)

1.082 ± 0.004
(26.10 ± 0.10)

0.422 ± 0.004
(10.73 ± 0.08)

0.888 ± 0.002
(22.55 ± 0.05)

0.327 (8.31)
Nom.

1.070 (27.18) Max.
0.279 ± 0.004 (7.10 ± 0.10)
Hole
Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.
0.380 ± 0.002/0.003
(9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.11
(8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

0.756 (19.20)
Nom.
Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

2
V11-T2-52

0.876 ± 0.004
(22.25 ± 0.10)

0.909 ± 0.017
(23.09 ± 0.44)
1.075 ± 0.004
(27.30 ± 0.10)

Hole
Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.
0.636 ± 0.030
(16.17 ± 0.755)

0.866 + 0.004/–0.008
(22.00 + 0.10/–0.20)

Panel Thickness
0.030–0.118
(0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

Accessories

2

Panel Cutout Fillers
If panel cutout fillers are
required in anticipation of
future rocker or paddle
switch installation, order
Catalog Number 1609DUM.

2

Specify color of base and filler
portion by using the standard
two-digit color code (base
and lever) for non-illuminated
switches.

2
2

Example: 1609DUM11

2

Legends

2

How To Order—Legends

2

To order a rocker with a legend marking, add the three-character code to the end of the
catalog number. Example: 1500-21E becomes 1500-21E038.
Legends are for 1500/2500 and 1600/2600 only.

2

Most Popular Legends 1
Legend

Code

Legend

014

Code

Legend

653

2

Code

2

735

2

I

0

ON

0

Legend

714

OFF

I

Code

0

2
023
POW

656

725

746

2

ER

I

2

0

038

657

730

ON

0

O FF

I

039

671

2

752

2
2
734

2

760

2

ON

OFF

0

2
630

2
2
2

Note
1 For additional legend options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-53

2.7
2

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Contents

Rockette Series

Description

2

Page

Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Standard Rockette Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2

V11-T2-55
V11-T2-56
V11-T2-57
V11-T2-58
V11-T2-58

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

These rocker switches offer
the widest selection of
features available, providing
the design flexibility needed
to fill the requirements of a
variety of applications. They
are available in two versions:
standard and sealed.

Voltages
●
110 Vac neon
●
14 Vdc and 28 Vdc
On the illuminated version,
the lamp is wired to operate
in conjunction with the
switch on single-throw
circuit; on double-throw
circuits, the lamp is
independent of the switch

Standard and Sealed
●
Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●
Hot stamped or pad
printed legends on rocker
and bezel
●
Paddle actuators
●
Single rocker operator on
two- and three-pole circuits
●
Dry circuits capabilities
●
Special ratings
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●
Special circuits
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Metal snap-in bezels
●
Foam dust seal

The Sealed Rockette features
a silicone rubber seal that
protects contacts and
mechanisms. All switches
resist contaminants such as
sand, dust and moisture with
both a base-to-frame seal
and an actuator seal. Nonilluminated and illuminated
versions are available. For
Sealed Rockette selection,
see table on Page V11-T2-56.

2
2
2

●

Mounting
Flush (two screws), sub-panel
and snap-in mounting
●

●
Snap-in Mounting
Convenient front panel
or sub-panel snap-in
mounting

Available in single- and twopole non-illuminated or in
single-pole illuminated
Rockette switches. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative for three- and
four-pole circuits
Unless otherwise noted,
all switches with snap-in
mounting are UL Recognized
and CSA Certified

2

Sealed Only
●
Special voltage bulbs
●
Industry standard
connector available
●
Two-pole illuminated circuit

2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-54

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●

UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2.7

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Standard Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Standard Rockette Switches
Example:

Rating
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac

Poles
and
Throw
2PST

1000W, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac 1
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

DOWN
Position

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

8150K21

C

2PST

ON
ON
ON

NONE
OFF
NONE

OFF
ON
ON

8155K21
8155K20
8155K22

C

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

8130K20

4PST

ON
ON
ON

NONE
OFF
NONE

OFF
ON
ON

8140K21
8140K20
8140K22

2PDT

2PDT

2PDT

4PDT

E

6

T

50

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Base
Circuit
Number
8132K21
8132K20
8132K22
8138K20
8138K30
8142K21
8147K21
8142K20
8142K22
8148K20
8148K30

2PST
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

8132K21

2
3

Circuit
Number
C

3
3

D

C

D

D
3

F
E
F

4

Mounting Frame 5
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
E = Mounting, 2-pole
F = Mounting, 2-pole
G = Mounting, 2-pole
W = Snap-in
X = Snap-in
Y = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
H = Mounting, 4-pole

Rocker/Paddle Style
All Except
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
6 = 2-pole
7 = 2-pole
20 = 2-pole 7
37 = 2-pole 8
8130K20, 8140K20,
8140K21, 8140K22
14 = 4-pole

2
Rocker/Paddle Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black

Terminal Type
50 = Screw
51 = Solder lugs
52 = 0.250 in spade

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

6

2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 These switches also have marked rating of 7A at 277 Vac and 3/4 hp at 277 Vac.
2 Add code letters and numbers for mounting frame, rocker style and color and terminal construction.
3 Also rated 2A, 277 Vac; 2.5A, L125 Vac.
4 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
5 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
6 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.
7 Cannot be used with snap-in mounting bezel.
8 Recommended for use with snap-in mounting.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-55

2.7

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Sealed Rockette Switches

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and
add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Rating
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT
2PST

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

Rating
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac

Poles
and
Throw
1PST
1PDT

ON
MOM. ON

2
2

0.250 in
Spade
8055K23
8055K20
8055K26
8055K29
8055K32
8055K43
8055K40
8055K46
8055K49
8055K52

Solder
Lugs
8055K24
8055K21
8055K27
8055K30
8055K33
8055K44
8055K41
8055K47
8055K50
8055K53

Screw
8055K25
8055K22
8055K28
8055K31
8055K34
8055K45
8055K42
8055K48
8055K51
8055K54

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Circuit
Number
1

A
B
C
D

Mounting Frame
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in

2

Rocker Color
M = White
V = Black

Rocker Style 3
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave

NONE
OFF

DOWN
Position

OFF
ON

8057K23

Base Circuit Number
Terminal Type
0.250 in
Spade
8057K23
8057K29

Circuit
Solder
Number
1
Screw
Lugs
8057K24 8057K25 G
8057K30 8057K31 H

E 1

5

V

Mounting Frame
E = Standard
F = Standard
L = Standard
X = Snap-in
W = Snap-in
Z = Snap-in

Notes
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
2 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
3 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.

2
2
2
V11-T2-56

1

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
2

Rocker Style 3
3 = Serrated w/1 lens
5 = Smooth w/1 lens
8 = Concave w/1 lens

2

2

Base Circuit Number
Terminal Type

V

Bulb Voltage
1 = Neon 110V
3 = 14 Vdc filament
4 = 28 Vdc filament

2

2

OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

2

2

NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

DOWN
Position

Example:

2
2

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

E 2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Illuminated

2
2

8055K23

Example:

2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rocker Color
M = White
V = Black

Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = Red
4 = Amber
5 = Blue

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

2.7

8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number
and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated
Example:
Circuit with Rocker in …

Rating
30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac

UP
Position

Poles
and
Throw

8058K28

Z 7

DOWN
Position

Terminal Type

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

Base Circuit Number

CENTER
Position

2

V

0.250 in
Spade

Solder
Lugs

Screw

Circuit
Number

1

2

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

N/A

N/A

8058K10

A

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K22

B

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K28

B

1PDT

MOM ON

OFF

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K31

B

1PDT

MOM ON

OFF

MOM ON

N/A

N/A

8058K34

B

3

Mounting Frame
E = Standard ears up with two
tapped holes
F = Standard flat with two holes
X = Metal snap-in
Z = Standard plastic snap-in
W = Contour plastic snap-in
L = Standard ears up with
two holes

2

Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black

2
2
2
2
2

4

Rocker Style
1 = Two-face serrated
2 = Three-face smooth
7 = Concave

2
2

8058K22E7V

8058K10X7T

8058K28Z7V

2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 Supplied with terminal screws, (Cat. No. 11-8616), unassembled.
2 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.
3 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59.
4 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-57

2.7
2
2
2
2

Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Technical Data and Specifications
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated
Description

Specification

Description

Specification

Ratings and
circuits
Contact
mechanism

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-55 to V11-T2-57.
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc.
Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism.
Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC applications

1000W rated

Movable—Checon SK015B contact material welded to contactor
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button

Terminal types

Screw terminals—Brass designed to accept #6-32 x 3/16 binding head
screws (Cat. No. 811-2), furnished unassembled
Solder lug—0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade

Termination
material

Screw and spade—Brass
Solder— Tintillate-plated brass

Lamp voltages

110 Vac neon
14 Vdc and 28 Vdc

Mounting

Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting

2

Contact material
3–6A rated

2

10–15A rated

2

Rockers

20A rated

2

Movable—Silver-plated copper
Stationary—Silver-plated copper
Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Movable—Silver-plated copper with cad-oxide contact
face button
Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button

2

Dimensions

2

Base Standard Rockette Switch Dimensions

Snap-In Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Terminals

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type W
Type X

2
2
2

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78)
Lg. Binding Head
Term. Screw

0.125
(3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.040
(1.02)

2

0.188
(4.78)

2

Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped

2

0.288
(7.32)

Contoured Snap-In
Bezel, Two-Pole Base

0.040
(1.02)

Snap-In Bezel, Single-, Twoand Four-Pole Bases

1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)

2.06
(52.32)

Screw Terminal

1.12
(28.44)

2

0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)

2

Type Y

Type Z

2

Sub-Panel Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Single- and Two-Pole Bases

Snap-In Mounting Bezel,
Two-Pole Base Only

1.94
(49.27)

1.700
(43.18)

2
2
2
2
2

0.960
(24.38)

Panel Opening

2

125°C
Approx.

2

1.450 1.190
(36.83) (30.23)

2
0.680 (17.27)

2

0.830
(21.08)

2

Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)

2
V11-T2-58

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.7

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Frame Types and Rocker/Paddle Styles for Standing Switches—Non-Illuminated Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types

2

Type E

Type F

Style 37 with Type X

1.940 (49.28)

2.500 (63.50)

1.620
(41.15)

2.250
(57.15)
CC

0.380
(9.65)

2

0.100 (2.54)

CC

0.380
(9.65)

0.850 ± 0.030
(21.59 ± 0.76)

2

0.380 ± 0.030
(9.65 ± 0.76)

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

2

17.5° 0.200 (5.08)

2

0.640 ± 0.254
(16.26 ± 6.45)

Type G

2

2.120 (53.85)
1.750
(44.45)

2

CC

0.380
(9.65)

2

Mounting Type
Recommended with This Style
0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

2

Two-Pole Rocker Styles
Style 6

Style 7

0.650
(16.51)

17.5°

0.650
(16.51)
R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

0.660
(16.76)

CC

CC

Four-Pole Mounting Frame Type
Type H

2

R 0.100
(R 2.54)

2

0.830
(21.08)
0.100
(2.54)

0.880
(22.35)

0.580
(14.73)

2

Style 20

2

CC

2
2

Four-Pole Rocker Styles
Style 14

1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)

1.300
(33.02)

2
R 0.610
(R 15.49)

2

CC

2

CC

2

#6-32
Tap 2 Holes

2
2

Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Bottom of Terminal
Dimension in Inches (mm)

Dimension in Inches (mm)

Mounting Frame Type

Mounting Frame Type

Two-Pole

Four-Pole

2

Rocker
Style
Type E

Type F

Type G

Recommended
Panel Opening

Rocker
Style
Type H

Recommended
Panel Opening

2

6

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

14

1.34 x 1.25 (34.04 x 31.75)

7

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2

20

N/A

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

N/A

37

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.08 (2.03)

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-59

2.7
2
2
2
2

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Base Sealed Rockette Switch Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type E—Rocker Style 1
17.5˚

1.940 (49.28)
0.080
(2.03)

1.620 (41.15)

2

Quick
Connect
Term.

0.648 (16.46)

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws
6-32 Tap

0.250 (6.35)

0.750
(19.05)

0.031 (0.79) Ref.

0.288
0.040
(7.32)
(1.02)
Screw Terminal

1.330
(33.83)

2
2

Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type F—Rocker Style 1

2

R 1.135
(R 28.83)

2
2

Panel Opening

35˚
17.5˚

2.500 (63.50)
R 0.610
(R 15.49) 0.722
(18.34)

0.453
(11.51)

0.032
(0.81)
0.031/0.033
(0.79/0.84)

0.250
(6.35)

0.062
(1.57)

2.250 (57.15)

2 Mtg. Holes
0.172 (4.37) Dia.

2.020 (51.31)
0.260 (6.60)

2

BB

1.062 (26.97)

2

0.031
(0.79)

0.250
(6.35)

Type X

Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped

0.390
(9.91)

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg.
Binding Head
Term. Screws

0.031 (0.79) Ref.
0.040
0.288
(1.02)
(7.32)
Screw Terminal

Type Z
1.550 ± 0.010
(39.37 ± 0.254)
1.700
(43.18)

2

0.960
(24.38)

0.900 ± 0.010
(22.86 ± 0.254)

Snap-In Mounting Bezel

Snap-In Bezel

2

Reference Dimensions “AA” and “BB” in Inches (mm) 1
Terminal
Type

Dimension “AA” (Two-Pole)
E Frame

F Frame

L Frame

Dimension “BB”
W Frame

X Frame

Z Frame

All Frames

Screw

1.39 (35.33)

1.05 (26.62)

1.39 (35.33) 1.37 (34.82)

1.39 (35.34) 1.37 (34.82)

0.30 (7.62)

Solder lug

1.36 (34.57)

1.02 (25.86)

1.36 (34.57) 1.34 (34.06)

1.36 (34.51) 1.34 (34.06)

0.27 (6.86)

0.250 in spade 1.53 (38.89)

1.19 (30.18)

1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)

1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)

0.44 (11.18)

8058 Screw 2 1.509 (38.33) 1.145 (29.08) 1.509 (38.33) 1.808 (45.92) 1.627 (41.33) 1.528 (38.81)

0.460 (11.68)

Notes
1 Dimension “AA”—Top of frame to bottom of terminal; “BB”—from bottom of base to bottom of terminal.
2 #8-32 x 1/4 Phillips screw.

2
V11-T2-60

0.040
(1.02)

0.188
(4.78)

1.620 (41.15)

2
2

1.090
(27.69)

0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole
0.280
(7.11)

0.750
(19.05)

2
2

Terminals
0.648
(16.46)

35˚

0.960
AA (24.38)

2

Panel Thickness
0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)

1.330 (33.83)

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Sealed Two-Pole Switch—Mounting Frame Type W—Rocker Stye 7

2

0.680
(17.27)
0.830
(21.80)

0.750
(19.05)

2
2

0.648
(16.48)

0.294
(7.47)

Snap-in Mounting Frame Dimensions

0.126
(3.20)

1.190
(30.23)
1.450
(36.83)

0.094
(2.39)

AA

BB

0.032
(0.81) Ref.

125°C
Approx.

Max.
0.812
(20.62)

2
2

0.040
(1.02)
Solder Lug Terminal
Hot Tin Dipped

0.380 (9.65)

BB

2

2

0.188
(4.78)

0.094 (2.39)

0.062
(1.57)

AA

0.032
(0.81)

2

0.125 (3.18)
Dia. Hole

Max.
0.812
(20.62)

0.380 (9.65)

2

2

Terminals

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.7

Rockers
Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Dimensions for Frame Type and Rocker Styles—Sealed Switches

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated

Illuminated

2

Single- and Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types

Single-Pole Mounting Frame Types

Type E

Type E

2

1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)

0.380
(9.65)

1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)

CC

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

2

0.380
(9.65)

2

CC

2

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

Type F

2

Type F

2.500 (63.50)

2.500 (63.50)

0.380
(9.65)

2.250 (57.15)

2

0.380
(9.65)

2.250 (57.15)

CC

2

CC

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

2

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

Type L

Type L

1.940 (49.28)

2

1.940 (49.28)
1.620
(41.15)

CC

1.620 (41.15)

0.380 (9.65)
0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole

0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole

2

0.380 (9.65)

Single- and Two-Pole Rocker Styles

Single-Pole Rocker Styles

Style 1

Style 3

2
2
2

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51)

2

CC

0.650
(16.51)

CC
0.216
(5.49)

Style 2

2

CC

0.360
(9.14)

2

Style 5

2

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49)
0.650
(16.51)

0.650
(16.51)

CC

0.216
(5.49)

Style 7

2

CC

0.360
(9.14)

2

Style 8
R 1.135 (R 28.83)
0.650
(16.51)

R 0.610
(R 15.49)

0.350
(8.89)
0.650 0.496 R 0.610
(16.51) (12.60) (R 15.49)

CC

2

R 1.135 (R 28.83)

2

CC

2
2

Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Rocker Face
Dimension in Inches (mm)

2

Dimension in Inches (mm)

Mounting Frame Type

Mounting Frame Type

Rocker Single- and Two-Pole (Non-Illuminated)
Style E Frame
F Frame
L Frame

Recommended Panel Opening

Rocker
Style

Single- and Two-Pole (Illuminated)
E Frame

F Frame

L Frame

Recommended Panel Opening

1

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

3

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

5

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

7

0.11 (2.79)

0.45 (11.43)

0.11 (2.79)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

8

0.11 (2.79)

0.45 (11.43)

0.11 (2.79)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-61

2.8
2

Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR

Contents

8006/8007 Series

Description

2

Page

8006/8007—EURO SR
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2

V11-T2-63
V11-T2-64
V11-T2-64

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Field-proven in America’s
roughest off-road
applications, the standard
size EURO SR is one tough
and reliable rocker switch.
Available with the complete
range of rugged single- and
two-pole, illuminated or
non-illuminated circuits.

Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.

Additional colors of rockers
and bezels are available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●
Special voltage bulbs
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Foam dust seal
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Wire leads
●
Dead back cover
●
Palm guard
●
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●
EURO SR panel plug:
53-3318
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.

The EURO SR Series offers
snap-in mounting and can be
provided with a durable
silicone seal that resists dust
and moisture.
All EURO SR switches are
molded in an aesthetically
pleasing matte finish and
operate with a crisp tactile
feel, allowing for easy
actuation.
The EURO SR will accept
loads up to 15A. Terminal
numbers are stamped on
base for easy identification.

2

●

Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. Rocker and bezel
are a high-grade nylon
supplied with matte finish.
●

●
Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●
Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.

Seal
Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with
silicone rubber seal, providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP67 rating.
●

2
2
2

●

Lens Options
●

Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
Green . . . . . . . . . . 28-5415
Amber . . . . . . . .28-5415-2
Red. . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-4
White . . . . . . . . .28-5415-5

2
2
2
V11-T2-62

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2.8

Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR

EURO SR Standard Size Euro-Style Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—EURO SR, Non-Illuminated
Example:

Rating

Poles
and
Throw
1PST

1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2PST

2PDT
2PDT 2
2PDT 3

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

2-3
2-3 1
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
5-6

8006K23

N

NONE

OFF

OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
OFF

OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
5-6
5-3

2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
OFF
5-1

0.250 in
Spade
8006K23
8006K35
8006K20
8006K26
8006K29
8006K32
8006K43
8006K55
8006K40
8006K46
8006K49
8006K52
8006K58
8006K61

Solder
Lugs
8006K24
8006K36
8006K21
8006K27
8006K30
8006K33
8006K44
8006K56
8006K41
8006K47
8006K50
8006K53
8006K59
8006K62

T

2

1

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type
DOWN
Position

1

Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom half
palm guard

Screw
8006K25
8006K37
8006K22
8006K28
8006K31
8006K34
8006K45
8006K57
8006K42
8006K48
8006K51
8006K54
8006K60
8006K63

Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black

Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed

Rocker Style
1 = Two-face

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

How To Order—EURO SR, Illuminated
Example:

Rating

Poles
and
Throw
1PST

1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2PST
2PDT
45

4

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

OFF
NONE
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1

NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

8007K23

N

2-1
2-11
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
2-1, 5-4
NONE
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1

0.250 in
Spade
8007K23
8007K35
8007K20
8007K26
8007K29
8007K32
8007K43
8007K55
8007K40
8007K46
8007K49
8007K52

Solder
Lugs
8007K24
8007K36
8007K21
8007K27
8007K30
8007K33
8007K44
8007K56
8007K41
8007K47
8007K50
8007K53

1

3 T

2

2

1

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type
DOWN
Position

4

Screw
8007K25
8007K37
8007K22
8007K28
8007K31
8007K34
8007K45
8007K57
8007K42
8007K48
8007K51
8007K54

Mounting Frame
Color /Style
N = Black/standard
T = Black/top half
palm guard
B = Black/bottom
half palm
guard
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8

Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2 = Independent
Rocker Style
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 = Two-face
w/2 lenses 4
Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black

2
Lens Color
1 = White
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Amber
5 = No lens
6 = Blue
7 = Clear

Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed

Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2
3A at 250 Vac, 6A at 125 Vac.
3 1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5 Not standard with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4.
6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4 for all double-throw switches.
7 Available on single-pole versions only.
8 14 Vdc, 18 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-63

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2.8
2
2
2

Rockers
8006/8007—EURO SR

Technical Data and Specifications
8006/8007—EURO SR
Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac
10A at 250 Vac
3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
25,000 operations minimum at full load
Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm)
Spade—Brass
Screw—Brass (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass
Thermoset molding material
Thermoplastic rocker actuators
1000V rms, minimum
IP67 (with optional seal)
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel
–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Circuits
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Terminal types

Base material
Rocker material
Dielectric
Seal level
Mounting means
Operating temperature

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated

2

Illuminated
1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)

R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)

2

Palm Guard

2
2

2

1.427 + 0.020/– 0.012
(36.25 + 0.51/– 0.38)
1
2
3

1.450
(36.85)
1.190
(30.23)

2

2

0.250 ± 0.004
(6.35 ± 0.08)
0.030 (0.813) Thick

0.440 ± 0.005
(11.18 ± 0.13)

2

0.830
(21.08)

4
0.680 (17.27)

0.389 ±0.040
(9.88 ±1.02)

0.096 ±0.010
(2.44 ±0.25)

1.082 ± 0.012
(27.48 ± 0.30)

2

2

R 0.156 ±0.005
(3.97 ±0.13)

0.096 ± 0.010
(2.44 ± 0.25)

2

2

0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)

0.389 ± 0.041
(9.88 ± 1.06)

2

2

1.705 ± 0.011
(43.31 ± 0.31)

0.957 ± 0.012
(24.31 ± 0.30)

2

2

R 0.156 ± 0.010
(R 3.96 ± 0.25)

5

1.705 ±0.012
(43.31 ±0.30)

1.220 ±0.012
(30.99 ±0.30)

6

0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)

Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.02 to 3.56)
Best Results Obtained from:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.18)

2
V11-T2-64

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size

2.9

Contents

8004/8005–Euro Full Size

Description

Page

8004/8005—Euro Full Size
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-66
V11-T2-67
V11-T2-67

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Eaton’s 8004 and 8005 EuroLook Series features matte
finish European styling and
snap-in mounting. These
durable switches, field-tested
in the most demanding truck
and marine applications, are
available with a variety of
standard actuator options.
Options include concave,
two-face, illuminated, nonilluminated and the recessed
feature, which allows
placement of your label on
the face of our rocker. All
switches in this rugged lineup
can be fitted with a silicone
rubber seal to provide
moisture and dust-resistance.
Additionally, these switches
can be gang-mounted into a
single panel opening. Panel
blanks are also available.

●
Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.

Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Gold contacts
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Pad-printed legends on
rocker and bezel
●
Special lamp voltages
●
Foam dust seal
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Printed circuit terminals
and other terminal types
●
Dead back cover (two-pole
base) with wire leads
●
Matching indicators
●
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
●
Full size Euro-Look gang
mounting systems
●
Full size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.

Rocker Material
Custom styled, multi-colored
thermoplastic rocker
actuators. The rocker and
bezel are supplied with a
matte finish.
●

Lamps
Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc,
18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon
and 250 Vac neon—are
offered as standard. For
additional lamp voltages,
please contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●

Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●

●
Seal
Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed
devices are furnished with a
silicone rubber seal providing
moisture and dust resistance
with an IP54 rating.

●

2
Lens Options
●

Lens Part Numbers
(if ordered separately)
8005 Two-Face
Green . . . . . . . . . 28-3425
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-3425-2
Red . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-4
White . . . . . . . . 28-3425-5
8005 Concave
Red . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148
Green . . . . . . . . 28-5148-2
Amber . . . . . . . . 28-5148-3
Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-4
Clear . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-5

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1

2
2
2

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-65

2.9

Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size

Full Size, Euro-Look Rocker Switches

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Full Size Euro, Non-Illuminated
Example:

2
2
2

Rating

Poles
and
Throw

2

1PST

2

1PDT

2
2

10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2PDT

2

2PDT 2
2PDT 3

2
2

2PST

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

2-3
2-3 1
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
5-6

OFF

OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1

NONE

OFF

OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
5-6
5-3

2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1
OFF
5-1

Example:

Rating

2
2

0.250 in
Spade
8004K23
8004K35
8004K20
8004K26
8004K29
8004K32
8004K43
8004K55
8004K40
8004K46
8004K49
8004K52
8004K58
8004K61

Solder
Lugs
8004K24
8004K36
8004K21
8004K27
8004K30
8004K33
8004K44
8004K56
8004K41
8004K47
8004K50
8004K53
8004K59
8004K62

1

Poles
and
Throw
1PST

1PDT
10A, 250 Vac
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2

2PST
2PDT

2

2
2
2
2

1

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M = White
T = Red
G = Gray

Screw
8004K25
8004K37
8004K22
8004K28
8004K31
8004K34
8004K45
8004K57
8004K42
8004K48
8004K51
8004K54
8004K60
8004K63

Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
G = Gray

Rocker Style
0 = Recessed
1 = Two-face
6 = Paddle
7 = Concave

45

4

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

OFF
NONE
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
OFF
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1

NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

8005K23

N

Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed

2-1
2-1 1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
2-1, 5-4
NONE
2-1, 5-4
2-3, 5-6
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4 1

0.250 in
Spade
8005K23
8005K35
8005K20
8005K26
8005K29
8005K32
8005K43
8005K55
8005K40
8005K46
8005K49
8005K52

Solder
Lugs
8005K24
8005K36
8005K21
8005K27
8005K30
8005K33
8005K44
8005K56
8005K41
8005K47
8005K50
8005K53

1

3 T

2

1

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type
DOWN
Position

4

Screw
8005K25
8005K37
8005K22
8005K28
8005K31
8005K34
8005K45
8005K57
8005K42
8005K48
8005K51
8005K54

Mounting
Frame Color
N = Black
M = White
T = Red
G = Gray
Bulb Voltage
1 = 125V neon 7
2 = 250V neon 7
3 = 14 Vdc 8
4 = 28 Vdc 8
7 = 18 Vdc 8

2
2

T

How To Order—Full Size Euro, Illuminated

2

2

N

Terminal Type
DOWN
Position

NONE

2
2

8004K23

Lamp Wiring
1 = Dependent
2 = Independent
Rocker Style
2 = Recessed
w/1 lens 6
3 = Two-face
w/1 lens 6
4 = Two-face
w/2 lenses 4
5 = Recessed
w/2 lenses 4
8 = Concave
w/1 lens 6
9 = Concave
w/2 lenses 4

Rocker Color
M = White
T = Red
V = Black
G = Gray
Lens Color
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Amber
5 = No lens
6 = Blue
Seal Option
1 = Non-sealed
2 = Sealed

Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2 3A at 250 Vac, 5A at 125 Vac.
3
1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac.
4
All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp
centered in open-pole of base.
5 Not standard available with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9.
6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9 for all double-throw switches.
7 Available on single-pole versions only.
8 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.

V11-T2-66

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.9

Rockers
8004/8005—Euro Full Size

Technical Data and Specifications

2

8004/8005—Euro Full Size

2

Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
(hp rating does not apply to lighted switches)
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT; Maintained and momentary action
Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
25,000 operations minimum at full load
Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade—Brass
Screw—Brass #6-32 x 3/16 (terminal screws provided unassembled)
Solder—Tintillate-plated brass; tintillate spade terminals
Thermoset molding material
1000V rms, minimum
IP54 (with optional seal)
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Circuits
Contact material
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Terminal types

Base material
Dielectric
Seal level
Mounting means

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Non-Illuminated

2

Illuminated
1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

2

1.970 ± 0.010
(50.04 ± 0.25)

R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)

1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.

0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)

R 0.004 ± 0.005
(R 0.125 ± 0.13)

1.440 ± 0.010
(36.58 ± 0.25)
R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.

0.519 ± 0.005
(13.18 ± 0.13)

2
2
2

Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)

1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)

0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)

Surface Length Along
Bottom of Recess:
1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)

1.087 ± 0.005
(27.61 ± 0.13)

0.090 ± 0.005
(2.29 ± 0.13)

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

0.080 (2.03)

0.080 (2.03)
0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)

0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)

1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)

0.031 (0.79)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick
1

1

1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)

Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)

0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)

2 3

1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)

4

5

6
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)

0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)

4

5

2
2
2
2
2

0.031 (0.79)
0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81)
0.001 (0.032) Thick

0.328 ± 0.015
(8.33 ± 0.38)

2 3

0.440 ± 0.010
(11.18 ± 0.25)

1.602 ± 0.029
(40.69 ± 0.76)

2
2

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

0.395 ± 0.029
(10.03 ± 0.76)

0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)

1.024 ± 0.010
(26.01 ± 0.25)
0.689 ± 0.010
(17.50 ± 0.25)

2
2
2

6
0.687 ± 0.015
(17.45 ± 0.38)

2

Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)

2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-67

2.10
2

Rockers
X Series Rockers

Contents

X Series Rockers—XR

Description

2

Page

X Series Rockers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Light Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2
2

V11-T2-69
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-70
V11-T2-71

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description
The Electrical Sector is
pleased to offer X Series
Rockers for use in outdoor
applications to meet almost
every market need.
These sleek style rockers
are molded in a unique
smooth matte finish. The
bezel is also unique with
a more modern roundedrectangular design with an
oval shaped rocker. X Series
Rockers are available in
single- and double-pole with
various circuit options, LED
illumination, and laser
etching.
●
Frames and actuator colors
are black
●
Switches provided with
0.025 spade quick connect
terminals

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Market Applications

Seal
Standard IP56 Sealing per
IES 60529.

●

●
●
●
●
●
●

●

Agriculture
Bus
Commercial
Marine
Specialty Vehicle
Truck

Illumination
Standard LED voltages
offered include 14 Vdc and
125 Vac.
●

Material
Frames are nylon and
actuators are nylon with glass
fiber with both meeting UL
flame: 94HB. Terminals are
silver plated brass.

●

●

Panel plug: 53-3318
Industry standard
connector: 28-3426
For information on optional
features, contact your
local Eaton Sales
Representative.

●

●
Mounting Means
Easy snap-in mounting with
plastic bezel.

Standards and
Certifications
●

●
●

UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada File E2702
T85
RoHS Compliant

●
Label
Eaton part number etched on
switch for easy inventory
management.

Product Selection Guide
Seal

Actuator

Decorative

Termination

Illumination

Top

✔

Rocker without bezel

—

Laser-etch

✔

Spade

✔

Incandescent 6 Vdc

—

Neon 110V

—

Bottom

—

Rocker with bezel

✔

Pad-print

—

Solder

—

Incandescent 12 Vdc

—

Neon 125V

—

Panel

—

Paddle

—

Screw

—

Incandescent 14 Vdc

—

Neon 250V

—

2

Snap-in lens

—

Poles

Weld lugs

—

Incandescent 18 Vdc

—

14 Vdc LED

✔

Locking

—

Single

✔

Incandescent 24 Vdc

—

28 Vdc LED

—

2

Label

—

Double

✔

Incandescent 28 Vdc

—

125 Vac LED

✔

Four

—

277 Vac LED

—

2

2
2
V11-T2-68

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.10

Rockers
X Series Rockers

X Series Rockers

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

Standard rating 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V
Also recommended for use in applications up to 21A 14 Vdc
IP56 per IES 60529

2
2

Product Selection
XR Series Rocker

2

X Series Rockers
Lamp
Voltage

Switch
Function

Light
Circuit 3

Lens Color
T. 1-4

None

SPST OFF-ON

X = None

None

SPST OFF-ON

X = None

SPST OFF-ON

E=

SPST OFF-ON

14 Vdc LED

None

125 Vac LED 1

T. 3-6

Switch
Markings

Catalog Number

None

Int’l ON/OFF 4

XRXAXXXNV1CU

None

None

ON/OFF 4

XRXAXXXNV1DB

None

Amber

None

XR1AEX4NV1XX

E=

None

Green

None

XR1AEX3NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Red

None

XR1AEX2NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1CG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR1CG33NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1BG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR1BG33NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1EG44NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Green

Green

None

2

X = None

None

None

Int’l ON/OFF

DPST OFF-ON 2

X = None

None

None

ON/OFF 4

XRXMXXXNV1DB

DPST OFF-ON

X = None

None

None

None

XRXMXXXNV1XX

DPST ON-ON

X = None

None

None

None

XRXNXXXNV1XX

DPST OFF-ON

2
2
2
2
2
2

XR1EG33NV1XX
4

2

XRXMXXXNV1CU

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Amber

None

XR3AEX4NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Green

None

XR3AEX3NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Red

None

XR3AEX2NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3CG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3CG33NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3BG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3BG33NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3EG44NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3EG33NV1XX

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 Available in AC applications only.
2 Double-pole not available illuminated; it is available laser etched.
3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-70.
4 See Symbols Library on Page V11-T2-70.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-69

2.10
2
2

Rockers
X Series Rockers

X Series Symbols Library
Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

CU

2

DB

2
2
2
2

Technical Data and Specifications
X Series
Description

Specification

2

Ratings

16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V;
recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc

2

Operating temperature

–4° to 176°F (–20° to 80°C)

2

Light Diagrams

2

X Series

2

Light Circuit
Letter

Functions

Light Circuit
Letter

Functions

Light Circuit
Letter

Functions

2

X

All

E

SPST

G

SPDT

2
2

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

5

2

5

3

6

1

2
3

5
6

2
3

5
6

2

5
2

3

6

2
3

5
6

2
2
3

6

Jumpers (3–4)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-70

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
X Series Rockers

2.10

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Mounting Hole

2
2

Y

2

X

2

Dimensions

2

Thickness

0.03–0.12
(0.75–3.0)

X

0.83 +0.01
(21.2 +0.1)

2

Y

1.46 + 0.01
(37.0 +0.1)

2
2

X Series
LED 1

2

LED 2

2
0.98
(25.0)

2
2
2

1.81 (46.0)
ON

OFF

ON

0.32
(8.0)

2
2

0.09
(2.2) 1.11
(28.2)

2
2
2

0.25
(6.4)

0.44
(11.2)

2

0.81
(20.7)

2

1.43 (36.2)

2
2

0.81
(20.7)

2
2

0.03
(0.8)

2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-71

2.11
2

Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT

Contents

8064/8065 Series

Description

2

Page

8064/8065—ESPORT
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
2

V11-T2-73
V11-T2-74
V11-T2-74
V11-T2-75

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

The ergonomically designed
ESPORT Series comes with
a large, independent LEDilluminated indicator window
that clearly identifies the
switch’s labeled function—
your label or ours. The switch
can be ordered with an LED
illuminated actuator, as well.
All ESPORT switches are
molded in a clean matte finish
and operate with a definite
tactile feel. Actuation of the
switch feels crisp. Also,
ESPORT switches will accept
loads up to15A. Due to the
LED’s long life, lamp
replacement should not be
necessary.

Contact Mechanism
Slow-make/slow-break
contact mechanism. Butt
action contact mechanism
designed specifically for use
on AC and low voltage DC
applications.

Tested in America’s toughest
truck applications, the
ESPORT switch is reliable
and durable and is available
with a full range of rugged
single- and two-pole circuits.
It has an optional polarized
lock-on connector. Spade
switch terminals are tinplated for long storage life.

●

Rocker Material
Thermoplastic rocker
actuators. Different colors are
available. The rocker and the
bezel are a high-grade nylon
and are supplied with an
aesthetically pleasing matte
finish.
●

Lamps
Durable, long-life LED
illumination; 14 Vdc is
standard. Integral indicator
is illuminated by two
independent green, yellow
or red LEDs while the
actuator is lighted using
one dependent LED. For
additional LED voltages and/
or colors, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●

Options
Lenses
All switches can be ordered
with either a frosted clear
lens (Cat. No. 28-5555) or
a translucent white lens
(Cat. No. 28-5555-2). The
clear lens will allow the
maximum amount of diffused
light to flow through your
label or one of ours. The
white lens is shipped
unassembled to facilitate the
addition of your engraved or
pad-printed legend.
●

●
Labels
The lens area of the integral
indicator will accept a label
0.750 x 0.450 and 0.010 in
(19.05 x 11.43 x 0.25 mm)
thick. Our selection of
standard labels with white
legends on black polycarbonate background can
be found on Page V11-T2-74.

Mounting Means
Snap-in mounting with plastic
bezel.
●

2
2

Additional colors of rockers
and mounting bezels are
available
●
Special circuits
●
Special ratings
●
Dry circuit capabilities
●
Pad-printed legends on
lens, rocker and bezel
●
Special indicator legend
labels
●
Special LEDs and LED
voltages
●
Special actuators
●
Reversing jumpers
●
Solder terminals and other
terminal types
●
Wire leads
●
Polarized lock-on
connector: 28-5558
●
Full-size Euro-Look panel
plugs: 17-19544-2
For information on optional
features, contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
●

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL Recognized and
recognized component
for Canada: File 2702
RoHS Compliant 1

2
2

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

2
V11-T2-72

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.11

Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT

ESPORT Full-Size Rocker Switches
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2
2
2
2
2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—ESPORT, Non-Illuminated
Example:

Rating

Poles
and
Throw
1PST

1PDT
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2PST

2PDT

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

5-6
OFF
2-3
2-3
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3, 5-6
OFF
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6
2-3, 5-6 1
2-3, 5-6 1

NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
OFF
OFF

8064K10

DOWN
Position

OFF
5-4
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1 1
OFF
2-1, 5-4 1
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4
2-1, 5-4

Base
Circuit
Number
8064K10
8064K11
8064K14
8064K12
8064K17
8064K16
8064K20
8064K21
8064K24
8064K22
8064K27
8064K26

L

R

Z

1 W

2

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Style
S = 1 in paddle
L = 1.5 in paddle
B = Rocker

2

Rocker
LED Color
Z = None

Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Gray

LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc

Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green

Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2

1PST

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

5-6

NONE

2
2
2
2

Example:

Rating
15A, 125 Vac
15A, 28 Vdc

2

2

How To Order—ESPORT, Illuminated

Poles
and
Throw

2

8065K10

DOWN
Position

OFF

Base
Circuit
Number
8065K10

S

R

Y

1 W

2

2

2

Code letters and/or numbers.
Add to base circuit number.
Rocker Style
B = Rocker
S = 1 in paddle

Indicator
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green

Rocker
LED Color
R = Red
Y = Yellow
G = Green

Rocker Color
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Gray

LED Voltage
1 = 14 Vdc
2 = 28 Vdc

Lens Color
1 = Clear
2 = White 2

2
2
2
2
2
2

Notes
1 Momentary contact.
2 White lenses are furnished unassembled.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-73

2.11
2
2
2
2

8064/8065—ESPORT
Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc
1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT
Maintained and momentary action
Movable—Silver-plated copper with silver contact face button
Stationary—Copper with silver contact face button
Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum
Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum
Switch—Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Integral indicator—0.110 x 0.032 in (2.79 x 0.813 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass
Thermoset molding material
1000V rms, minimum
Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Circuits
Contact material
Mechanical life

2

Terminal types

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

8064/8065—ESPORT

Technical Data and Specifications

2
2

Rockers

Base material
Dielectric
Mounting means

Icon/Legend Selection
●
●
●

All labels below come with adhesive backing
Label legends are distinct and easily readable when illuminated from behind
Additional labels are available upon request. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative

Icons and Legends
Legend

Ordering
Code 1

Style

Dome
Light
Work
Light

0055
0056

TV/VCR

0065

Fridge

0066

Cruise
ON/OFF
Brake
Select
Brake
ON/OFF
Fan
Override
Cruise Set
Engine
Brake
Left
Window
Power
Mirror
Right
Window

0067

Icon

Description

Ordering
Code 1

Windshield Wiper
SAE Specification No. J1362-0086
White graphic on a black background

0057

Windshield Washer
SAE Specification No. J1362-0087
White graphic on a black background

0986

Master Lighting Switch
SAE Specification No. J1362-5012
White graphic on a black background

0687

Fog Lights
SAE Specification No. J1362-0633
White graphic on a black background

0684

Clearance/Position Light
SAE Specification No. J1362-0456
White graphics on a black background

0686

0068
Helvetica Narrow
0.135 in (3.43 mm) high
White translucent letters
Opaque black background

0069
0071
0681
0682
0683
0688
0689

Note
1 Ordering Code: If a standard label is required, add the Ordering Code to the end of ESPORT Switch part number preceded
by a dash. Example: To order 8065K10BYR1B1 with the 0684 Fog Lights label, the part number will be 8065K10BYR1B1-0684.

2
2
2
2
2
V11-T2-74

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.11

Rockers
8064/8065—ESPORT

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

2
2

0.434 ± 0.029
(11.02 ± 0.76)

2
3

2

1

+7

USA

6

5

4

1.598 ± 0.029
(40.59 ± 0.76)

-8

4

5

6

-8

0.110 (2.79)
0.004 (0.11) Thick

1

+7

2

See Detail A for
Label Dimensions

0.030 ± 0.010
(0.76 ± 0.25)
0.250 (6.35)
0.010 (0.25) Thick

2

1.064 ± 0.012
(27.03 ± 0.31)

R 0.156 ± 0.127
(R 3.96 ± 3.23)
2

2

1.598 ± 0.030
(40.59 ± 0.76)
Location of LED
when Illuminated

2 PDT—Non-Illuminated
Bottom View

3

2

0.100 ± 0.010
(2.54 ± 0.25)

2

5

4

2

0.750 ± 0.008
(19.05 ± 0.20)

USA

6

Panel
Opening

0.450 ± 0.006
(11.43 ± 0.15)

Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness:
0.060 to 0.150 (1.52 to 3.81)

2
2

-8

1 PST—Illuminated
Bottom View

2
2

1.970 ± 0.012
(50.04 ± 0.31)

1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.13)

0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)

2

Label Dimensions
Detail A

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-75

2.12
2
2
2

Rockers
Accessories

Dimensions for NGR, EURO SR, Full Size Euro-Look and ESPORT Rocker Accessories
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NGR Connector

Euro/SR and Full Size Euro-Look Connector

0.962 ± 0.029
(24.38 ± 0.76)

2.180 (55.37)
1.815 ± 0.059
(45.97 ± 1.52)

2

0.910
(23.11)

2

0.812
(20.62)

8

6

5B

0.954 ± 0.005
(24.13 ± 0.13)

2

4

7

2

5A

2

1.877 ± 0.059
(47.50 ± 1.52)

1.335 ± 0.005
(33.78 ± 0.13)

1.255
(31.88)

1.400
(35.56)

2
2
2
2

NGR Connector Catalog Number
28-5637-2 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack terminals
or AMP compatible connector
28-5940 accepts AMP
terminals 42100-2.

0.812
(20.62)
0.698
(17.73)
0.976
(24.79)

2
2
2

1.400
(35.56)

2

Euro-Look and EURO/SR
Connector Catalog Number
28-3426 accepts Packard
12015870 Metri-Pack
terminals.

2
2
2

ESPORT Connector

2
2
2

Retaining hinge functions to keep parts intact
through shipment and handling. Fracture
of the hinges does not affect form, fit or function
of the connector and its terminal retention
features.

Dimension Applies at
Base of Snap Leg

2
2

3

6

2

2

5

1.697 ± 0.020
(43.10 ± 0.51)

1

2
2
2

ESPORT Connector
Catalog Number 28-5558
Locations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 accept
1.701 ± 0.020
Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals.
(43.21 ± 0.51)
Locations 7 and 8 accept Packard
4
12034046 Metri-Pack terminals.
8

7
0.910 ± 0.020
(23.11 ± 0.51)

1.392 ± 0.014
(35.36 ± 0.38)

2.180 ± 0.020
(55.37 ± 0.51)

2
2
V11-T2-76

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.12

Rockers
Accessories

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Gang Mounting System
1.030
(26.16)

R 0.125
(R 3.18)

2.060 (52.32)

2

0.867
(22.02)

2
2

1.734
(44.02)
End
Bezel

1.897
(48.18)

2

2.000
(50.8)
2.280
(57.91)

(2) End Bezels

(2) End Bezels and (1) Center Bezel

2.026 + 0.010
(51.46 + 0.25/– 0.000)

3.056 + 0.010
(77.62 + 0.51/– 0.000)

2
R 0.187 (R 4.75)
R 0.165 (R 4.19)

0.661
(16.79)

NGR, Euro-Look and ESPORT Panel Plugs

C

17-21159

17-19264

17-19263

0.847
(21.51)

1.009
(25.63)

Euro-Look
ESPORT

NGR

A

0.080 (2.03)

0.100 (2.54)

B

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

R 0.080 (R 2.03)

C

0.340 (8.64)

0.335 (8.51)

D

0.530 (13.46)

0.550 (13.97)

E

R 0.156 (R 3.96)

R 0.250 (R 6.35)

E

Panel Opening
Reference Only
Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190
(0.76 to 4.83)
Panel plug Catalog Number
17-19544-2 for Use with
Euro-Look and ESPORT.
NGR panel plug Catalog
Number 17-21543.

2

1.024
(26.01)

Part will also fit Eaton
gang mounting boxes.
Catalog Numbers
17-19263 and
17-19264
0.867 + 0.005/– 0.000
(22.02 + 0.13/– 0.00)

2

R 0.156
(R 3.96)

2
2

0.650 +0.010/ –0.001
(16.51 +0.25/ –0.02)
0.985 ± 0.007
(25.02 ± 0.20)

2
2
2
2

0.130 ± 0.010
(3.30 ± 0.25)

1.450
(36.83)
1.190
(30.23)

Panel
Opening

2
2

1.735 ± 0.012
(44.07 ± 0.31)

1.427 ± 0.005
(36.25 ± 0.13)
1.734 + 0.005/– 0.000
(44.04 + 0.13/– 0.00)

2

0.494
(12.55)

Tolerence: +0.254/−0.000 (+ 0.254/–0.000) for Each
Center Bezel up to a Maximum of + 0.0002 (+ 0.050)

Top
View

2
2

D

1.380
(35.05)

1.970
(50.04)

17-21160

Euro-Look

1.255 + 0.009/ –0.001
(31.88 +0.25/ –0.03)

A

Bottom
View

NGR

EURO SR Panel Plugs

B

1.530
(38.86)

Center

Dimensions: 2.026 + 0.254/−0.00 (51.46 + 0.254/–0.000)
Plus Number of Center Bezels Times 1.03

2
1.200
(30.48)

End

1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)

Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness: 0.039 to 0.078 to 0.118
(1.00 to 2.00 to 3.00)

2

0.150
(3.81)

Bezel Catalog Numbers
Panel Opening
for 2 End Bezels

1.900 ± 0.020
(48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)

2

2
2

0.820 ± 0.005
(20.83 ± 0.13)

2

Panel Opening—Reference Only
Thickness:
0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55)
Best Results Obtained From:
0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)

2
2
2

0.680 0.830
(16.66) (21.08)

2
2

Panel Plug Catalog Number 53-3318
For Use with EURO/SR

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-77

2.13
2
2

SinglePole

Rockers
Technical Data

1
2
3

2
2
2

TwoPole

1
2
3

4
5
6

1
2
3

4
5
6

2
2
2

FourPole

7
8
9

10
11
12

Terminal Identification

Circuit Diagrams

When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.

Rocker Circuit Diagrams

All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.

2
2
2
2
2

“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram

Connection Points
Connect common to terminals

2

2

Connect circuit “A” to terminals

6

Connect circuit “B” to terminals

4

Connect circuit “C” to terminals

1

2
2

UP
Position

No. of
Poles
Circuit A

2
2

B
1PDT

C
2PST

2
3

D
2PDT

1
2
3

E
4PST 1

1 PDT

2

1

Schematic

I
2 Circuit 5

1

4

3

6

2

4

1

3

J
1PST

1
2
3

K
1PDT

5
6

L
2PST

4
5
6

2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12

7 10
8 11
9 12

1 4
2 5
3 6

Single-Pole
G3
1PST

4

M
2PST

2 4
1 3

6

N
2PDT

P
1PDT

2
6

3

Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent

Circuit Letter

2
3

F
4PDT 2

ON-ON-ON Special Circuit

Schematic

A
1PST

For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.

2
2

Circuit Letter

CENTER
Position
(Maintained)
Circuit B

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

H4
1PDT

4
2
3

Q7
2 Circuit

6

B
A

C
C

NC NO
H
G
NC
NO

Circuit C

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

6

4

5

6

Legends
Rocker Switch Legend
Legend

Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever

2

Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever

2

Center terminal and switch lever

2

Momentary contact

Bulb

Denotes mechanical contact portion

2

See next page for Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams. See Page V11-T2-17
for NGR Circuit Diagrams.

2

Notes
1
Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2
Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3
Dependent lamp.
4
Independent lamp.
5
Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6
For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7
Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

2
2
2
2
V11-T2-78

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Technical Data

2.13

Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams 1
Non-Illuminated
Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)

Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
CENTER
Position
Position

UP
Position

Schematic

1
1PST

OFF

2

NONE

ON

Circuit
Number
(Circuit
Designator)
18
1PST

1
2
1PST

OFF

12
11

3
1PST

NONE

OFF

2

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

1
4
1PST

OFF

2
1

5
1PDT

NONE

ON

3

ON

NONE

3

ON

2

OFF

MOM. ON

2

NONE

ON

1
ON

2

3

OFF

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

2

3

OFF

MOM. ON

1

11
2PST

12
2PST

13
2PDT

12

25

11

24

12

25

11

24

12

25

11

24

12 13 25 26
11

14
2PDT

13 12 26 25

16
2PDT

13 12 26 25

11

17
2PDT

11

OFF

NONE

ON

OFF

NONE

ON

2

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

2

MOM. OFF

NONE

ON

ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

NONE

ON

ON

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

MOM. ON

ON

NONE

ON

—

—

—

2
2

25 26

3
1

2

2

12
11

2

13

23
1PDT

25 26
24 13

24
1PDT

26

25

25
1PDT

2
2
2

26 25

26
1PDT

26
13 24

27
2PST

OFF

NONE

ON

28
2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

29
2PST 3

MOM. OFF

NONE

ON

30
2PDT

ON

31
2PDT

25

2

NONE

2

26 25
13 24
12

25

12

2
2

24

25
12
11
24
13 26

11
ON

2
2

11

ON

OFF

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

24

25

2

25

11

24

32
Indicator

2
2

24

12

2
2

3 2

2

Notes
1 Terminal numbers 1, 2 and 3 denote single-pole base.
Terminal numbers 11, 12, 113, 24, 25 and 26 denote two-pole base.
2
Single-pole in two-pole base with lamp independently wired.
3
Two-pole—independently wired lamp.

2
2
2

24

12 26

13

11

21
1PST

2

ON

24

12

2

NONE

2

12
11

2

OFF

24

15
2PDT

11

3
1

24

13 12 26 25
11

Schematic

13 24

1

10
2PST

UP
Position

13 24

3

9
1PDT

Circuit with Rocker In …
DOWN
CENTER
Position
Position

ON

1

8
1PDT

20
1PST 2

ON

1

7
1PDT

19
1PST

22
1PDT

2

6
1PDT

2

Illuminated

25

MOM. ON

OFF

2

MOM. ON

2

24

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-79

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

AA

AQ

BF

BU

AB

AR

BG

BV

AC

AS

BH

BW

AD

AT

BI

BX

AE

AU

BJ

BY

AF

AV

BK

BZ

AG

AW

BL

CA

AH

AX

BM

CB

AJ

AY

BN

CC

AK

BA

BP

CD

AL

BB

BQ

CE

AM

BC

BR

CF

AN

BD

BS

CG

AP

BE

BT

CH

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-80

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
CI

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
CX

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

DN

Catalog
Number Suffix
EC

2
2
2

CJ

CY

DP

2

ED

2
CK

DA

DQ

2

EE

2
CL

DB

DR

2

EF

2
CM

DC

DS

2

EG

2
CN

DD

DT

2

EH

2
CP

DE

DU

2

EI

2
CQ

DF

DV

2

EJ

2
CR

DG

DW

2

EK

2
CS

DH

DX

EL

CT

DJ

DY

EM

CU

DK

DZ

EN

CV

DL

EA

EO

CW

DM

EB

EP

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-81

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

EQ

FE

FS

GG

ER

FF

FT

GH

ES

FG

FU

GI

ET

FH

FV

GJ

EU

FI

FW

GK

EV

FJ

FX

GL

EW

FK

FY

GM

EX

FL

FZ

GN

EY

FM

GA

GP

EZ

FN

GB

GQ

FA

FO

GC

GR

FB

FP

GD

GS

FC

FQ

GE

GT

FD

FR

GF

GU

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-82

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
GV

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
HM

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

JD

Catalog
Number Suffix
JT

2
2
2

GW

HN

JE

2

JU

2
GY

HP

JF

2

JV

2
HA

HQ

JG

2

JW

2
HB

HR

JH

2

JX

2
HC

HS

JJ

2

JY

2
HD

HT

JK

2

JZ

2
HE

HU

JL

2

KA

2
HF

HV

JM

2

KB

2
LUZ

HG

HW

JN

KC

HH

HY

JP

KD

HJ

JA

JQ

KE

HK

JB

JR

KF

HL

JC

JS

KG

2
2

PASILLO

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-83

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

KV

KH

2

Catalog
Number Suffix
LJ

EXIT

2

KI

KW

KJ

KX

2
2

EXH
BRK

LK

LL

24V.
CHARGER

2
2

KK

KY

KL

KZ

KM

LA

KN

LB

LP

LC

LQ

LD

LR

KQ

LE

LS

KR

LF

LT

2
2
2
2
2
2

AQUA
HOT
HEAT
EXCHGR
AIR
COMPSR

LM

LN

LO

DIAG

2
2

KO

2
2

KP

2
2

CRUISE
SELECT
TEST
ALARMS

2
2

PA

2
AUX HYD
OVERHEAT

2
KT

2

LH

VIDEO

2

KU

2

LI

ENTER

2
2

LG

KS

2

1
2

G-AUX
START
CNTR
A/C

REAR
A/C

LU

LV

LW

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-84

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
LX

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
ML

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

NB

Catalog
Number Suffix
NP

LY

MM

NC

2

NQ

2

CODE
LZ

MN

ND

2

NR

POSITION

2

LIGHT

UPPER
WARN

LOWER
WARN
COMPT
LIGHTS

WORK
LIGHTS
FAST
IDLE
MIRROR
HEAT

GEN
PTO

MA

MO

NE

2

NS

2
MB

MP

NF

2

NT

2
MC

MS

NG

2

NU

2
MD

MT

NH

2

NV

2
ME

MU

NI

2

NW

2
MF

MV

NJ

2

NX

2
MG

MW

NK

NY

MH

MX

NL

NZ

MI

MY

NM

PA

MJ

MZ

NN

PB

MK

NA

NO

PC

2
2
2
2
2

WIGWAG

SIREN
BRAKE
LEFT
SCENE
1
2

2
2

DIAG

MASTER
WARN

2

2
2
2
2
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-85

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

PD

PS

PE

PT

PF

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

RG

RW

RH

RX

PU

RI

RY

PG

PV

RJ

RZ

PH

PW

RK

SA

PI

PX

RL

SB

2
2
2
2

CHECK
ENGINE

2
2
2
2
2
2

D

2
2

PY

PJ

RM

SC

H

2
2

PK

PZ

RN

SD

PL

RA

RP

SE

PM

RB

RQ

SF

PN

RC

RS

SG

PP

RD

RT

SH

RE

RU

SJ

RF

RV

SK

2
2

ABS
CODE

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
PQ

2
2

PR

2

OVER
LOAD
DRIVE
AXLE

2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-86

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
SL

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
TA

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

TQ

Catalog
Number Suffix
UE

2
2
2

SM

TB

TR

2

UF

2
SN

TC

TS

2

UG

Mode

2
SP

TD

TT

2

UH

2
SQ

TE

TU

2

UK

2
SR

TF

TV

2

UL

2
SS

TG

TW

2

UM

2
ST

TH

TX

2

UN

2
SU

TJ

TY

2

UP

2
SV

TK

TZ

UR

SW

TL

UA

US

SX

TM

UB

UT

SY

TN

UC

UU

SZ

TP

UD

UV

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-87

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

UW

VM

WC

WT

UX

VN

WD

WU

UY

VP

WE

WV

UZ

VR

WF

WW

VA

VS

WG

WX

VB

VT

WH

WY

VC

VU

WJ

WZ

VD

VV

WK

XA

VE

VW

WL

XB

VF

VX

WM

XC

VG

VY

WN

XD

VH

VZ

WP

XE

VK

WA

WR

XF

VL

WB

WS

XG

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-88

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
XH

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
XY

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

YN

Catalog
Number Suffix
ZC

2
2
2

XJ

XZ

YP

2

ZD

2
XK

YA

YQ

2

ZE

2
XL

YB

YR

2

ZF

2
XM

YC

YS

2

ZG

2
XN

YD

YT

2

ZH

2
XP

YE

YU

2

ZJ

2
XR

YF

YV

2

ZK

2
XS

YG

YW

2

ZL

2
XT

YH

YX

ZM

XU

YJ

YY

ZN

XV

YK

YZ

ZP

XW

YL

ZA

ZR

XX

YM

ZB

ZS

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-89

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

ZT

H1

Y1

N2

ZU

J1

Z1

P2

ZV

K1

A2

R2

ZW

L1

B2

S2

ZX

M1

C2

T2

ZY

N1

D2

U2

ZZ

P1

E2

V2

A1

R1

F2

W2

B1

S1

G2

X2

C1

T1

H2

Y2

D1

U1

J2

Z2

E1

V1

K2

A3

F1

W1

L2

B3

G1

X1

M2

C3

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-90

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
D3

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
T3

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

H4

Catalog
Number Suffix
Y4

2
2
2

E3

U3

J4

2

Z4

2
F3

V3

K4

2

A5

2
G3

W3

L4

2

B5

2
H3

X3

M4

2

C5

2
J3

Y3

N4

2

D5

2
K3

Z3

P4

2

E5

2
L3

A4

R4

2

F5

2
M3

B4

S4

2

G5

2
N3

C4

T4

H5

P3

D4

U4

J5

Q3

E4

V4

K5

R3

F4

W4

L5

S3

G4

X4

M5

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-91

2.14
2
2

Rockers
Symbols Library

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

N5

C6

S6

G7

P5

D6D6

T6

H7

Q5

E6

U6

J7

R5

F6

V6

K7

S5

G6

W6

L7

T5

H6

X6

M7

U5

J6

Y6

N7

V5

K6

Z6

P7

W5

L6

A7

Q7

X5

M6

B7

R7

Y5

N6

C7

S7

Z5

P6

D7

T7

A6

Q6

E7

U7

B6

R6

F7

V7

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-92

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
W7

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
L8

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

A9

Catalog
Number Suffix
Q9

2
2
2

X7

M8

B9

2

R9

2
Y7

N8

C9

2

S9

2
Z7

P8

D9

2

T9

2
A8

Q8

E9

2

U9

2
B8

R8

F9

2

V9

2
C8

S8

G9

2

W9

2
D8

T8

H9

2

X9

2
E8

U8

J9

2

Y9

2
F8

V8

K9

Z9

G8

W8

L9

1A

H8

X8

M9

1B

J8

Y8

N9

1C

K8

Z8

P9

1D

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-93

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

1E

1L

1S

1Y

1F

1M

1T

1Z

1G

1N

1U

2A

1H

1P

1V

2B

1J

1Q

1W

2C

1K

1R

1X

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-94

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

MM

LX

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

NB

Catalog
Number Suffix
NR

MN

LY

NC

2

NS

SHDN
OVRD

HI
RPM
LOW
RPM

2
MP

MA

ND

2

NT

EXHST
BRK
MB

2
2

SET/CST

2

2

2
MQ

NE

2

NU

2
MC

MR

NF

2

NV

2
MS

MD

NG

2

NW

2
TEST

MT

ME

NH

2

NX

2

P
MU

MF

P
MG

MH

MV

NJ

F
N

MW

2

NY

2
NK

2

NZ

2
NL

O3

2

AUX
WARN

2

MI

MX

NM

PA

MJ

MY

NN

PB

MK

MZ

NP

PC

ML

NA

NQ

PD

2
2
2
2

OVER
LOAD

2
2
2

RSM/ACC
1
2

2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-95

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

PT

QH

QX

PF

PU

QJ

QY

PG

PV

QK

PH

PW

QL

PI

PX

QM

PE

2

AUTO

2
2
2
2

AUTO

2
2
2
2

SET
ACCEL
RESUME
DECEL

QZ

RA

RB

CTIS

2

PJ

PY

QN

RC

PK

PZ

QP

RD

2
2

WINCH

2
2

QA

PL

QQ

RE

CRANE

2
2

QB

QR

QC

QS

QD

QT

RH

PQ

QE

QU

RJ

PR

QF

QV

RK

PS

QG

QW

RL

PM

2

AUTO

2

PN
AUTO

2

n/min

2

PP

AUTO
MODE
MAN
MODE

RF

RG

AUTO

2

n/min

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-96

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
SB

RM

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

SR

Catalog
Number Suffix
TF

2
2
2

SC

RN

SS

2

TG

2
SD

RP

ST

2

TH

2
RQ

SE

SU

2

TJ

2
RR

SF

SG

RS

SV

RPM
CTRL

SW

2

TK

2
2

TL

2
SH

RT

SX

2

TM

2
SJ

RU

SY

2

TN

2

ENG
DIAG

RV

SK

SZ

2

TP

2

RW

SL

TA

RX

SM

TB

TR

RY

SN

TC

TS

RZ

SP

TD

TT

SA

SQ

TE

TU

2

TQ

2
2

CHEM
ALARM

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-97

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

TV

UK

UZ

VP

TW

UL

VA

VQ

TX

UM

VB

VR

TY

UN

VC

VS

TZ

UP

VD

UA

UQ

VE

VU

UB

UR

VF

VV

UC

US

VG

VW

UD

UT

VH

VX

UU

VJ

VY

UV

VK

VZ

UG

UW

VL

WA

UH

UX

VM

WB

UY

VN

WC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

FAULT

2

VT

OK

2
2
2

P

2

2
2
2
2
2
2

UE

F

2
2

UF

LH

2
2
2

AUTO

2
2

UJ

2

RH

2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-98

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
WD

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
WT

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

XJ

Catalog
Number Suffix
YA

2
2
2

WE

WU

XL

2

YB

2
WF

WV

XM

2

YC

2
WG

WX

XN

2

YD

2

SET/RES
WH

WY

XP

2

YE

2
WJ

WZ

XQ

2

YF

2
WK

XA

XR

2

YG

2
WL

XB

XS

2

YH

2
WM

XC

XT

2

YJ

2
WN

XD

XU

YK

WP

XE

XV

YL

WQ

XF

XW

YM

WR

XG

XY

YN

WS

XH

XZ

YP

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-99

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

YQ

ZE

ZV

K1

YR

ZF

ZW

L1

YS

ZG

ZX

M1

YT

ZH

ZY

N1

YU

ZJ

ZZ

P1

YV

ZK

A1

R1

YW

ZL

B1

S1

YX

ZM

C1

T1

YY

ZN

D1

U1

YZ

ZP

E1

V1

ZA

ZR

F1

W1

G1

X1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

RPM

2
2

ZB

ZS

ZC

ZT

H1

Y1

ZD

ZU

J1

Z1

RPM

2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-100

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers
Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2
Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
A2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix
R2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

G3

Catalog
Number Suffix
U3

2
2
2

B2

S2

H3

2

V3

2
C2

T2

I3

W3

2
2

D2

U2

J3

2

X3

2
E2

V2

K3

2

Y3

2
F2

W2

L3

2

Z3

2
G2

X2

M3

2

A4

2
H2

Y2

N3

2

B4

2
J2

Z2

O3

2

C4

2
K2

A3

P3

D4

L2

B3

Q3

E4

M2

C3

R3

F4

N2

D3

S3

G4

P2

F3

T3

H4

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2
V11-T2-101

2.14

Rockers
Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog
Number Suffix

I4

P4

V4

B5

J4

Q4

W4

C5

K4

R4

X4

D5

L4

S4

Y4

X5

M4

T4

Z4

X6

N4

U4

A5

X7

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

O4

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.
SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-102

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices
High Capacity Switch

3.1

High Capacity Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2

3.3

Keylock

V11-T3-2
V11-T3-2
V11-T3-2

V11-T3-3
V11-T3-3
V11-T3-4
V11-T3-4

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

V11-T3-2

Panelboard Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Panel Board Switch

V11-T3-2

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V11-T3-5
V11-T3-5
V11-T3-6
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-8

Locking Rocker
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V11-T3-9
V11-T3-9
V11-T3-9
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Locking Rocker

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-1

3.1
3

Special Devices
High Capacity Switches

Contents

High Capacity Switch

Description

3

High Capacity Switches

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Product Description

Technical Data and Specifications

The heavy duty high capacity
switch, Catalog Number
7818K1 is ideal for
exceptionally high-power
applications, for heavy-duty
motor loads and for use in
welding equipment or similar
industrial applications.

High Capacity Switches

By combining innovative
design and quality materials,
this switch is designed to
carry the specified maximum
inrush current for 10
milliseconds for a minimum
of 20,000 ON/OFF cycles.

Terminal types

Screw—brass (Catalog Number 11-6074-4) supplied. Furnish unassembled

Mounting means

Molded flush mounting bracket, high impact polycarbonate, 3.312 in (84.12 mm),
center-to-center spacing and 2.375 in (60.33 mm) spacing for self-tapping screws

Lever

Nylon

Standards and
Certifications

Dimensions

●

UL® to Standard 508,
File E147754

Description

Specification

Circuits

2PST, maintained

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break snap acting butt contact
Make: 200A peak inrush at 125 Vac for 10 ms for 20,000 cycles minimum
Break: 20A at 125 Vac for 20,000 cycles minimum

Contact material

10% silver cadmium oxide composite

Base

Molded thermoset material

Dielectric withstand

2200V rms minimum

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
7818K1

3
3
3

3.812 (96.82)
3.281 (83.34) Mtg.

Product Selection

3

2.250 (57.15)
Max.

3
3
3

0.781
(19.84)

1.250
(31.75)

3
3

1.406 (35.71)
Max.

High Capacity Switch
Description

Catalog Number

40A, 600 Vac
5 hp, 250 Vac

7818K1

V11-T3-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices
Panelboard Switches

3.2

Contents

Panel Board Switches

Description
Panelboard Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .

Page

3

V11-T3-4
V11-T3-4

3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Product Description
This group of two-position
power toggle switches is
used by manufacturers in a
wide variety of applications
that require dependability
and long service, such as
welding equipment,
commercial floor polishers,
battery chargers, food
processors and panelboards.

3

Standards and
Certifications
●
●

3

UL Recognized
CSA® Certified as noted

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-3

3.2

Special Devices
Panelboard Switches

3

Product Selection

3

8980K1

Panelboard Switches
Poles
and Throw

Mounting

Terminals

Catalog Number

60A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 125–250 Vac/Vdc 1

2PST

N/A

N/A

8980K1 2

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
30A, 125V “T”
2 hp, 120–240 Vac

1P double break

Frame plate

Center bus

8980K2

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K5

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
20A, 600 Vac
2 hp, 120–600 Vac
Three-phase

3PST

Panel type

Screw

8980K6

3

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac
1 hp, 480 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K14 3

3

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc
2 hp, 120–240 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K16

Rating

3
3
3
3

8980K5

3
3

3
3
3

Technical Data and Specifications
Panelboard Switches
Description

Specification

3

Rating

10–60A; 120–600V
See Product Selection table

3

Circuits

1PST, 2PST, 3PST 2 circuit, maintained
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, momentary

3

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action
Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, quick-make/quick-break butt contact

3

Contact material

Movable—bronze; stationary—copper; Catalog Number 8980K13—silver

Terminal types

Screw or bus

3

Termination material

Copper

Mounting means

Two-hole mounting—panel type flush

3

Dielectric withstand

1000 volts rms minimum

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

3
3

Notes
1 For appliance use only; 32A, 480 Vac, 25A, 600 Vac.
2 CSA Certified.
3 Binding screws assembled. For binding screws provided unassembled, order Catalog Number 8980K30.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V11-T3-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

3.3

Contents

General Purpose and Heavy Duty Keylocks

Description

Page

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy
Duty—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T3-6
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-7
V11-T3-8

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Product Description

Features

General Purpose

Termination Types

Mounting Means

General Purpose
Solder lugs—Brass silverplated

General Purpose
Threaded bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.

Heavy Duty
●
7842 Series
Screw terminals—Brass
designed to accept #7-32 x
3/16 binding head screws

Keyway—0.062–0.067 in
wide x 0.035–0.370 deep
(1.55–1.70 mm wide x
0.89–0.94 mm deep

These keylock switches
provide reliable performance
in a space-saving design.
They all use quick-make/
quick-break switching
mechanisms, with wiping
action blades for self-cleaning
contacts.

Heavy Duty
These switches have a slowmake/slow-break switching
mechanism with large butt
type contacts. Their high
current switching capability
allows them to be used for
locking switching circuits in
power applications.

Furnished unassembled
7846 Series
Quick connect terminals—
Brass
●

Hardware supplied—
1 hexnut (Cat. No. 15-192)
and 1 chamfered dress nut
(Cat. No. 15-994-2)
Furnished unassembled

3
Heavy Duty
●
7842 Series
Slotted bushing—0.468 in
(11.89 mm) dia.
Hardware supplied—
4 terminal screws and
1 hexnut
Furnished unassembled
7846 Series
Hardware supplied—
2 hexnuts
●

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-5

3.3
3

Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

Product Selection
General Purpose Keylock AC/DC Switches

3

Circuit with Key in … (Keyway Down)
CENTER
Position
RIGHT
LEFT
(Keyway)
Position
Position

Key
Removal
Position

Solder Lug Terminal
Catalog Number

3

Rating

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PST

—
—

OFF
OFF

ON
ON

CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT

8928K492
8928K493

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PDT

—

ON

ON

CENTER and RIGHT

8928K494

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1-1/2A, 250 Vdc

1PDT

—

ON

ON

CENTER

8283K150

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc

2PST

—
—

OFF
ON

ON
OFF

CENTER
CENTER

8370K150
8370K151

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PST

—

OFF

ON

CENTER and RIGHT

8928K495

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc
3A, 250 Vdc

2PDT

—
—

ON
ON

ON
ON

CENTER
CENTER and RIGHT

8373K150
8373K151

3

Poles and
Throw

Heavy Duty Keylock AC Rated Switches

3

Rating

3

Circuit

Action

Key Removal Slotted Bushing Length
Position
Inches
mm

Type of
Termination

Key Style

Catalog
Number

2PST

OFF-ON-OFF-ON

OFF

Quick Connect

E (13-8173)

7846K1 1

7846 Type Series
20A, 120 Vac
20A, 240 Vac
1-1/2 hp, 120 Vac
2 hp, 240 Vac

3
3

0.50

12.7

Note
1 Not CSA Certified.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
V11-T3-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices
Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

3.3

Accessories
Keys for Locking Switches
Additional keys may be
ordered from the Key
Selection table.

Where Used

13-8171

Key styles shown match
those listed for specific
switches in the Product
Selection tables.

3

Key Selection

13-5496

13-8173

3

Catalog
Number

General purpose and heavy
duty series

13-5496

3

Security locking bracket

13-8171

3

7846K1

13-8173

3
3
3

Rotary Keylock Brackets—
Security Tumbler Type

Key Selection

This series of rotary keylock
is designed for use in security
applications. They provide a
simple method of converting
single- and two-pole toggle
switches. For use with twoor three-position switches.

Where Used

3

Catalog
Number

Key removable in counterclockwise position

3

8980P25

3

Key removable in clockwise 8980P27
position
Key removable in either
extreme position

3

8980P28

3
3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated
Description

General Purpose

Heavy Duty

3

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained action

2PST, 2-circuit
maintained

3
3

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Contact material

Movable—Bronze silver-plated
Stationary—Brass silver-plated

Movable—Silver cadmium oxide
Stationary—Silver cadmium oxide

3
3

Rotary Keylock Brackets
Description

Specification

Bushing

7/8 in dia., 24 threads/inch

3
3

Mounting hardware and keys
1 hexagon locknut

Cat. No. 15-2528-2

1 bright chrome plated dress nut

Cat. No. 15-2528-2 (furnished unassembled)

2 keys

Cat. No. 13-8171

3

Lock bushing

Diecast zinc

Lock barrel and dress nut

Chrome plated brass

3

Keys

Brass

3

Finish

3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-7

3.3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8928K493—1PST/1PDT

8373K151—2PST/2PDT
0.196
(4.97)

0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)

0.516
(13.11)

0.196
(4.97)

0.198 (5.03)
0.200 (5.08)

0.516
(13.11)

18°

18°

18°

0.471 (11.96)
Dia.
0.473 (12.01)

0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)

0.056 (1.42)
0.068 (1.73)

Mtg. Hole

3
3

Special Devices

15/32−32 Thds.

Mtg. Hole
Key Removable in
Both Positions

0.061 (1.55)
0.063 (1.60)

3

0.545
(13.84)

0.841
(21.36)

3
3

1.375
(34.92)

0.687
(17.45)
1.080
(27.43)

0.750
(19.05)
0.960
(24.38)

1.080
(27.43)

3

Key Removable in
Both Positions

15/32−32 Thds.

0.490
(12.45)

3

18°

0.471 (11.96)
Dia.
0.473 (12.01)

0.010
(0.25)

0.220
(5.59)

0.823
(20.90)

0.735
(18.67)

0.175
(4.44)

3
3

7842K2—2PST

3
3
3
3
3

7846K1—2PST

Keyway 0.065 W x 0.032−0.035 D
(1.65 W x 0.81−0.89 D)

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.044−0.046 D
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.12–1.17 D)

15/32−32 TPT

0.718
(18.24)

0.953
(24.21)

0.750
(19.05)
1.032
(26.21)

0.343
(8.71)

3

1.171
(29.74)

1.312
(33.32)

3
3
3
3
3

1.296
(32.92)

3

0.906
(23.01)

3
3
3
V11-T3-8

7/8–24 T.P.I.
(22.23)

15/32−32 TPT

0.500
(12.70)

0.562
(14.27)

8980P27

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices
Locking Rockers

3.4

Contents

Locking Rockers

Description

Page

Locking Rockers
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10
V11-T3-10

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Product Description
This unique switch features
a patented internal locking
mechanism, which allows the
switch to be locked in the
OFF position to prevent
unauthorized or accidental
operation. The key to locking

or unlocking the switch is a
removable paddle rocker cap,
which must be inserted in
order to move the switch to
the ON position. The switch
can still be turned OFF.

The locking rocker is ideally
suited for such markets
as portable tools, computers,
lawn and garden equipment,
marine and construction.

3

Standards and
Certifications
●
●
●

3

UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1

3
3

Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for
selection information and
optional features.

Locking Rocker Switch
DOWN
Position

Poles and Throw

Base Circuit
(See Page
V11-T3-10)

Catalog
Number

3
3

Without Palm Guard Feature

3

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

8166K27

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

8166K28

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

8166K25

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

8166K26

3

ON

NONE

OFF

A

8166K23

3

3

With Palm Guard Feature
20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac

3
3

Circuit with Rocker in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

20A, 125 Vac
20A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125 Vac
2 hp, 250 Vac

3
3

Product Selection

Rating 2

3

1PST
1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

8166K24

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

8166K21

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

8166K22

3
3

Notes
1
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.
2
Ratings listed for 125 Vac also apply at 28 Vdc. Also supplied with a 20A, 277 Vac rating as standard.

3
3
3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-9

3.4

Special Devices
Locking Rockers

3

Accessories

3

53-3021-2

Replacement Cap

3

Description

Catalog
Number

Red paddle rocker replacement cap

53-3021-2

3
3
3

Technical Data and Specifications

Circuit Diagrams

3

Locking Rocker Switch

Locking Rocker Circuit Diagrams

Description

Specification

Circuit Letter

3

Contact
mechanism

Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on
AC and low voltage DC applications

3

A
1PST

Contact
material

Movable—Silver-plated copper w/cad-oxide contact face button
Stationary—Copper w/cad-oxide contact face button

3
3
3
3
3
3

Terminal types

0.25 in spade terminals are standard

Rocker
material

Custom styled, red thermoplastic rocker key with “REMOVE TO LOCK”
across the top of the key in raised letters

Dielectric

1000V rms minimum

Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions
0.650
(16.51)

0.440 (11.18)
0.250
(6.35)

0.745
(18.92)

3

1.450
(36.83)

0.960
(24.38)

0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)

Locking Rocker Switch with Palm Guard

3

Recommended
Panel Cutout
Dimensions

0.960 (24.38)

0.744
(18.90)

0.225
(5.72)

0.650 (16.51)

1.700
(43.18)

1.190
(30.23)

1.080
(27.43)

3
3

1.190
(30.23)

1.700
(43.18)

1.080
(27.43)

3

3

1
2
3

Locking Rocker Switch without Palm Guard

3

3

B
1PDT

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

3

2
3

Dimensions

3

3

Schematic

0.250
(6.35)

3

0.440
(11.18)

1.450
(36.83)

0.745
(18.92)

0.960
(24.38)

0.680 (17.27)
0.830 (21.08)

3
3
V11-T3-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Circuit Letter

Schematic

C
2PST

2
3

D
2PDT

1
2
3

5
6
4
5
6

Toggle Switches
Military

4.1

Introduction
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2

Illuminated AC Rated

4.4

4.7

X Series Toggles

4.9

V11-T4-10
V11-T4-10

V11-T4-12
V11-T4-16
V11-T4-16

V11-T4-20
V11-T4-21
V11-T4-21

V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-26

V11-T4-27
V11-T4-29
V11-T4-29

Accessories
Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-31

Decorator Facenuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Panel Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Replacement Terminal Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Indicating Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-34

Technical Data
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V11-T4-24

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8

V11-T4-9

X Series Toggles
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Purpose AC/DC Rated

V11-T4-7

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6

V11-T4-6

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5

V11-T4-3

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4

Military Purpose Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3

V11-T4-2

V11-T4-35

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-1

4.1
4

Toggle Switches
Introduction

Contents

Toggle Switches

Description

4

Military Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated. . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated. . . . . . . .
X Series Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Selection Guide

4

Toggle Switches

4

Military Purpose Toggles

Illuminated AC Rated Switches

General Purpose Toggles—
AC Rated

Product Selection

Page V11-T4-3

Page V11-T4-9

Page V11-T4-20

Circuit Diagram

Page V11-T4-35

—

Page V11-T4-35

Product Description

Eaton’s military purpose switches
are designed to meet the
requirements of MIL-S-83731

These illuminated switches
are available only in single-pole
circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized
with single-pole housing the lamp.

These AC rated toggle switches offer
the widest selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a variety of
applications.

X Series Toggles

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

General Purpose Toggles—
AC/DC Rated

4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Selection

Page V11-T4-20

Page V11-T4-24

Page V11-T4-27

Circuit Diagram

Page V11-T4-35

—

Page V11-T4-35

Product Description

This line of switches employs a quickmake/quick-break contact mechanism.
These switches are especially suited for
use in small motor applications.

Eaton’s new, competitively priced, AC
rated X Series toggles offer a standard
high rating for both single- and two-pole
applications.

The most common application
for this switch is to help prevent
motor damage resulting from
the high current generation by
counter EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing.

4
4
V11-T4-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-3
V11-T4-9
V11-T4-11
V11-T4-20
V11-T4-24
V11-T4-27
V11-T4-31
V11-T4-35

Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles

4.2

Contents

Military Purpose Toggles

Page

4

V11-T4-6
V11-T4-7

4

Description
Military Purpose Toggles
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description
Eaton’s military purpose
switches are designed to
meet the requirements of
MIL-S-83731. Sealed
Switches have a silicone
rubber lever seal assembled
between the lever and the
bushing to resist the entrance
of contaminants such as
dust, sand or water into the
contact structure.

The switch mechanisms are
completely enclosed to resist
the entrance of contaminants
into the switch. All metal
parts are plated to resist
corrosion. The heavy duty
switches are offered in both
standard toggle lever and
lever lock versions. Circuit
designations are stamped on
the side of each switch.

4

Standards and
Certifications
●

4

MIL-S-83731

4
4
4
4
4

Product Selection

4

AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-S-83731
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Current
Ratings

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

4

Military
Solder Lug Terminals
Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35

Dimension
“A”
Inches (mm)

Dimension
“B”
Inches (mm)

MIL-S-83731
with Sealed
Lever

Catalog
Number

Single-Pole
See A
below

1PST

ON
ON
OFF

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON

A

—

0.906 (23.01)

MS25098-22
MS25098-29
MS25098-30

8261K22
8261K29
8261K30

See A
below

1PDT

ON
ON

NONE
NONE

ON
MOM. ON

B

0.937 (23.80)

—

MS25098-23
MS25098-26

8261K23
8261K26

Two-Pole
See B
below

2PST

ON
ON
OFF

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON

C

—

0.906 (23.01)

MS25100-22
MS25100-29
MS25100-30

8262K22
8262K29
8262K30

See C
below

2PDT

ON
ON

NONE
NONE

ON
MOM. ON

D

0.937 (23.80)

—

MS25100-23
MS25100-26

8262K23
8262K26

Current Ratings
Current Capacity in Amperes
per Pole = 125 Vac, 60 Hz
Part Number
A AII MS25098
B MS25100-22, 29, 30
C MS25100-23, 26

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

3.0
3.0
1.0

1.5
1.5
1.0

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V11-T4-3

4.2

Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 with Lever Seal

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

4

Poles
and
Throw

4

Current
Ratings

4

Single-Pole

4
4
4
4
4

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)

Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
MS Part
Number

Catalog
Number

See A
below
See B
below

1PST

ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF

NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE

OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

A

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35058-22
MS35058-24
MS35058-29
MS35058-25
MS35058-28
MS35058-30

8801K22
8801K23
8813K17
8813K18
8811K18
8811K17

See A
below
See B
below

1PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35058-21
MS35058-23
MS35058-26
MS35058-27
MS35058-31

8800K16
8810K15
8804K13
8812K14
8809K16

See C
below
See D
below

2PST

ON
ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF

NONE
OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE

OFF
NONE
MOM. OFF
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

C

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35059-22
MS35059-24
MS35059-29
MS35059-25
MS35059-28
MS35059-30

8822K20
8822K21
8828K13
8828K12
8826K14
8826K15

See C
below
See D
below

2PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35059-21
MS35059-23
MS35059-26
MS35059-27
MS35059-31

8820K16
8824K14
8830K13
8834K5
8832K6

See E
below

1P3T
in a
2P base

ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1
ON 1
ON 1
MOM. ON 1

ON 2
ON 2
ON 2
ON 3
ON 3
ON 3

ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4
ON 4
MOM. ON 4
MOM. ON 4

See
Page V11-T4-35

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS25201-4
MS25201-5
MS25201-6
MS25201-7
MS25201-8
MS25201-9

8860K4
8860K5
8860K6
8860K7 5
8860K8 5
8860K9 5

See F
below
See G
below

4PST

ON
ON
ON
NONE
OFF

NONE
OFF
MOM. OFF
OFF
NONE

OFF
NONE
NONE
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

E

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

—
MS25068-24
MS25068-25
MS25068-28
—

7660K12
7660K13
7668K7
7666K9
7666K6

See F
below
See G
below

4PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS25068-21
MS25068-23
MS25068-26
MS25068-27
MS25068-31

7662K7
7664K5
7674K5
7672K5
7670K6

Two-Pole

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Four-Pole

4
4
4
4
4

Current Ratings
Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc

115 Vac, 60 Hz

Switch

Type of
Operation

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

MS35058
MS35058
MS35059
MS35059
MS25201
MS25068
MS25068

Maintained
Momentary
Maintained
Momentary
ON-ON-ON
Maintained
Momentary

7
5
7
5
5
5
4

25
20
20
18
18
20
18

15
10
15
10
10
12
10

—
—
—
—
2
—
—

10
10
20
11
11
—
—

10
7
—
—
8
—
—

3
—
4
—
2
4
2

10
—
20
—
11
20
11

10
—
15
—
8
15
5

4
4

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

4
4
4

115 Vac, 400 Hz

Notes
1
Across terminals 2-3 and 5-6.
2
Across terminals 1-2 and 5-6.
3
Across terminals 2-3 and 4-5.
4
Across terminals 1-2 and 4-5.
5
For “INDEPENDENT ON-ON-ON” circuit arrangement, see Page V11-T4-35.

4
4
4
4
V11-T4-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.2

Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 Lever Lock with Lever Seal
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Current
Ratings

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position

Poles
and
Throw

Base
Circuit
See
(Keyway) Page V11-T4-35

Lever
Lock
Bushing
Style 1

4

Screw Terminals
with Sealed Lever
Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Lever Lock
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

4

MS Part
Number

Catalog
Number

Single-Pole

4
4

See A
below

1PST

ON
ON
ON

NONE
NONE
OFF

OFF
OFF
NONE

A

3
4
5

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25125-C2
MS25125-E2
MS25125-J4

8857K47
8857K48
8857K49

See A
below

1PDT

ON
ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE

ON

B

2
3
4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25125-B1
MS25125-C3
MS25125-E3

8857K40
8857K45
8857K44

4

ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
NONE

C

1
2
4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25126-A1
MS25126-B1
MS25126-E3

8858K39
8858K40
8858K44

4

ON

NONE

F

4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25127-E3

8859K44

ON
ON

Two-Pole
See B
below

2PDT

ON
ON
ON

Four-Pole
See C
below

4PDT

ON

Indicates direction against which lever is locked.

Switch

4
4
4
4

Current Ratings

A MS25125
B MS25126
C MS25127

4

Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
28 Vdc

115 Vac, 60 Hz

Type of
Operation

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

Lamp
Load

Resistive
Load

Inductive
Load

Maintained
Maintained
Maintained

5
7
5

20
20
20

15
15
15

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

3
4
4

10
20
20

10
15
15

115 Vac, 400 Hz

4
4
4
4

Note
1 See illustrations below for lever lock bushing styles.

4
Lever Lock Bushing Styles
Style 1

Style 2

Style 3

Style 4

4

Style 5

4
4

Locked in Three
Positions

Locked in
Center Positions

Locked in
Keyway Side

Locked out of
Center Position

4

Locked in Center
and Side Opposite
Keyway

4

These illustrations are for pictoral representation only—keyway on right-hand side.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-5

4.2

Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Military with Unsealed Lever

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
CENTER
DOWN
Position
Position
Position

4
4

Current
Ratings

4

Single-Pole

4
4

Poles
and
Throw

4

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON

A

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7300K38
7304K38
7303K38

7300K36
7304K36
7303K36

See A below

1PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7301K38
7302K38
7307K38
7306K38
7305K38

7301K36
7302K36
7307K36
7306K36
7305K36

See C below
See D below

2PST

ON
ON
OFF

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
MOM. OFF
MOM. ON

C

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7310K38
7314K38
7313K38

7310K36
7314K36
7313K36

See C below

2PDT

ON
ON
ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7311K38
7312K38
7317K38
7316K38
7315K38

7311K36
7312K36
7317K36
7316K36
7315K36

See D below

Current Ratings

4
4

Type of
Operation

4

Single-Pole
A Maintained
B Momentary
Two-Pole
C Maintained
D Momentary

4
4

4

5
4

20
15

15
10

15
15

7
5

30
20

15
10

25
15

Horsepower

250 Vac, 60 Hz
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load

Horsepower

—
—

—
—

6
6

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

9
6

—
—

—
—

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 1P3T (ON-ON-ON), 4PST and 4PDT; maintained and momentary action

Contact action

Heavy duty—Slow-make/slow-break butt contact
Medium duty—Quick-make/quick-break, wiping action

Contact material

Heavy duty:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Medium duty:
Movable—copper silver-plated
Stationary—bronze silver-plated

Terminal types

Heavy duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 6.35 mm (0.250 in) pan head (Catalog Number 11-1893) screws and Si bronze #6 helical lockwasher (Catalog Number
16-1096). Furnished unassembled. Terminal screws are tin dipped to facilitate soldering if required
Heavy duty JAN-S-23 types:
Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 4.78 mm (0.188 in) binding head (Catalog Number 811-2) screws. Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate plated brass
Medium duty MIL-S-83731 types:
Solder lugs—brass silver-plated furnished with 0.094 in (2.39 mm) dia. hole

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep; provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied:
MIL-S-83731 types— 2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6), 1 locking ring (Catalog Number 29-761) and 1 internal tooth lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-886).
Furnished unassembled
JAN-S-23 types—2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6). Furnished unassembled

4
4

125 Vac, 60 Hz
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load

Military Purpose Switches

4
4

Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole
30 Vdc
Lamp
Resistive
Inductive
Load
Load
Load

Technical Data and Specifications

4
4

Screw
Terminals
Catalog
Number

ON
ON
OFF

4

4

Solder Lug
Terminals
Catalog
Number

Two-Pole

4

4

Lever
Length
“B”
Inches (mm)

1PST

See B below

4

4

Bushing
Length
“A”
Inches (mm)

See A below
See B below

4

4

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See
Page V11-T4-35

4
4

Dielectric

1000V minimum

4

Operating temperature
range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

V11-T4-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.2

Toggle Switches
Military Purpose Toggles

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-83731 Switches

4

1PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)
0.070
(1.78)

14˚

0.687
(17.45)

0.680
(17.27)

14˚

0.687
(17.45)

0.041
(1.01)

15/32−32NS−2A

0.468
(11.89)

Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)

0.070
(1.78)

14˚

0.680
(17.27)

14˚

1

1.250
(31.75)

2

3 (Ref.)

Dim. A
0.937
(23.80)

4

5

6 (Ref.)

1

2

3 (Ref.)

0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal

0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal
0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal

1.250
(31.75)

B

15/32-32 Thds.

0.620
(15.75)

4

A

1.310
(33.27)

#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Pan Head Screws

4

1.060
(26.92)

1.040
(26.42)

0.750
(19.05)

4

1.310
(33.27)

1.120
(28.45)

15/32−32 Thds.

4
4

#6-32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws

Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide B

4
4

Four-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action

15/32−32 Thds.

1.430
(36.32)

Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

4
4

B

4

A

A

1.200
(30.48)

4

4

B

A

Two-Pole Momentary Action and 3 ON Circuits

4

4

0.750
(19.05)

#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Pan Head Screws

4

4

Two-Pole Maintained Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

15/32-32 Thds.

4

4

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Switches with Lever Seal

Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

4
4

Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)

0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal

Single-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action

4
4

0.041
(1.01)

15/32−32NS−2A

0.468
(11.89)

Dim. B
0.906
(23.01)

4

2PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)

4
1.320
(33.53)

4

1.250
(31.75)

4
4

#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35)
Long Pan Head Screws

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4
V11-T4-7

4.2
4
4
4

4

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Lever Lock Switches
with Lever Seal

AC Rated (Heavy Duty)

Single-Pole

1PDT Maintained Action

4

28˚

Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

14˚

15/32-32 Thds.

1.120
(28.45)

B

0.620
(15.75)

0.620
(15.75)

1.140
(28.96)
1.120
(28.45)

Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

60˚
#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57)
Long Binding Head Screw

Two-Pole

4

2PDT Maintained Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

4

28˚
14˚
0.750
(19.05)

4

B
15/32-32 Thds.

B

4
0.900
(22.86)

Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

A

A

4
4

1.040
(26.42)

#6-32 Screws

4

4

15/32-32 Thds.

A
A

4
4

B

15/32
Dia.

4
4

Military Purpose Toggles

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4
4

Toggle Switches

1.250
(31.75)

1.310
(33.27)

0.760
(19.30)

0.030
(0.76)
Ref.

0.270 (6.86)
0.040
(1.02)

#6-32 Screws

0.180 (4.57)

Four-Pole

2PDT Momentary Action
Keyway
0.030 (0.76) Deep
0.060 (1.52) Wide

36˚
18˚

0.750
(19.05)
0.800
(20.32)

B
15/32-32 Thds.

B
Keyway
0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W
(0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

A

A
1.310
(33.27)
1.310
(33.27)

4
4

1.590
(40.39)

0.910
(23.11)

#6-32 Screws

0.300
(7.62)

4
V11-T4-8

0.030
(0.76)
Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.3

Toggle Switches
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Contents

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Page

4

V11-T4-10
V11-T4-10

4

Description
Illuminated AC Rated Switches
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description
These illuminated toggles
are available only in singlepole circuitry. A two-pole
base is utilized with singlepole housing the lamp. On
single-throw circuits, the
lamp is wired to operate in
conjunction with the switch.

4

On double-throw circuits, the
lamp is independent of the
switch. On the sealed
versions, a silicone rubber
seal is fitted to the paddle
lever to provide a moistureand dust-resistant seal
between the lever and
bushing.

4
4
4
4
4

Catalog Number Selection

4

How To Order—Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Example:
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
CENTER
Position
Position

Rating

Poles
and
Throw

Standard
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

Sealed
15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST
1PDT

ON

NONE

7071K21

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

Base
Catalog
Number

Circuit
Number
See
Page
V11-T4-35

OFF

7071K21

G

G

1

52

4
4

Code letters and/or numbers—
add to base circuit number.
Lever Color
G = Green
T = Red
A = Amber

Bulb Voltage

4

1 = 14V

4
Terminal Type

ON
ON
MOM. ON

NONE
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
MOM. ON

7073K21
7073K20
7073K25

G

4

52 = 0.250 in spade

4
4

H

4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-9

4.3
4
4

Toggle Switches
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Technical Data and Specifications
Illuminated AC Rated Toggles
Description

Specification

4

Ratings

See Catalog Number Selection

Circuits

1PST and 1PDT; maintained and momentary action

4

Contact material

Movable—silver-plated copper
Stationary—silver-plated copper

4

Terminal types

Spade—brass

Base material

Colored thermoplastic paddle lever

4
4
4

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated
0.210 (5.33) Dia.

4
4

0.070 (1.78)

1.310
(33.27)

28˚
14˚

0.270
(6.86)

0.750
(19.05)

0.650
(16.51)

4

0.470
(11.94)

4
4

0.910
(23.11)
1.430
(36.32)

4

A

4

0.250 (6.35)

Keyway
0.030 (0.76)
0.070 (1.78)
Wide
Deep x
0.040 (1.02)
0.080 (2.03)
Quick Connect 0.440 (11.18)
Type
“A” Dim.

0.030 (0.76) Ref.
0.030 (0.76)

1.310 (33.27)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

Contents

General Purpose Toggles

Description

Page

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-12
V11-T4-16
V11-T4-16

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description

Features

These AC rated toggle
switches offer the widest
selection of features and the
design flexibility to meet a
variety of applications.

The optional features shown
below may not be available
on all toggle models. Contact
your local Eaton Sales
Representative.

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900
Series
●

●
●
●

●

●

●

●
●

●
●
●

3-independent ON Circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
Short (11/32 in) bushing
Tall (15/32 in) bushing
White nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
Black nylon designer
lever, see Dimensions
on Page V11-T4-16
Hardware—
furnished assembled
Reversing jumpers (not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Short (15/32 in) bat lever
Tall (11/16 in) bat lever
(not available with short
bushing)
Rotate keyway 180°
Lever seal
Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)

4

Options
7800 Series Only
●

●

●

●
●

●

3-independent ON circuit
(2PDT or 4PDT only, see
Page V11-T4-14)
Hardware—
furnished assembled
Reversing jumpers (Not for
use with 3-independent
ON circuit)
Rotate keyway 180°
Silicone lever seal
(1P and 2P only)
Omit one pole (2P, 3P,
4P only. Not for use
with 3-independent
ON circuit)

Combi-Term Option
This is an extension of our AC
rated general purpose toggle
switch. The “Combi-Term”
design allows the user the
option of screw terminals,
0.25 in quick connects or
solder termination all on the
same switch. The special
clips and screws are provided
in a poly bag with the switch.

Circuits
●

●

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT,
3PST, 3PDT, 4PST and
4PDT
Maintained and
momentary

Standards and
Certifications
●
●

●

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

UL®

Recognized
CSA® Certified
(except as noted)
RoHS Compliant 1

4
4

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-11

4.4
4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Product Selection

4

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

4
4

Rating
6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

DOWN
Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

OFF

A

ON

NONE

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

1PDT

ON
MOM. ON

NONE
OFF

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

1PDT

MOM. ON
ON

OFF
NONE

1PDT

ON
MOM. ON

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V Vac

1PST

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Screw
Terminals

0.250 in
Spade
Terminals

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)

7580K7
7580K6

7580K5
7580K4

7580K9
7580K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7581K6

7581K4

7581K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7582K6

7582K4

7582K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7585K6
7587K6

7585K4
7587K4

7585K8
7587K8

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7506K3

7506K4

7506K6

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7506K38

7506K36

7506K40

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7509K4
7510K6

7509K5
7510K7

7509K7
7510K9

OFF
OFF

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7508K38
7509K38

7508K36
7509K36

7508K40
7509K40

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)

7501K12
7501K13

7500K13 1
7500K14 1

7501K14
7501K15

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7503K13 1

7502K13

7503K15

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7505K4

7504K4 1

7505K6

20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7546K38

7546K36

7546K40

4

30A, 125 Vac
25A, 250 Vac 2

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7576K2

—

4

Notes
1 Also 4.2A L at 125 Vac rating.
2 Single-pole switch in two-pole base.

4

1PST

Bushing
Lever
Length “A”
Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

4
4

10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Rating

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

DOWN
Position

4

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in
Screw
CombiSpade
Terminals Terminals Term

4
4
4

6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2A, 277 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7590K6

7590K4

7590K8

—

6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac
2.5A, L at 125 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7591K6

7591K4

7591K8

—

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7592K6

7592K4

7592K8

—

4

6A, 125 Vac
3A, 250 Vac

2PDT

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7597K6

7597K4

7597K8

—

2PDT

ON

ON

OFF

7530

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7530K1

7530K3

7530K2

—

4

10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp
125–250 Vac

2PDT

ON

ON

ON

7555

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7555K12

7555K11

7555K13

—

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)

7561K5
7561K4

7560K6
7560K5

7561K7
7561K6

—

4

4
4
4
4

15A, 125 Vac
2PDT
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)
0.563 (14.30)

7563K5
7563K4

7562K5
7562K4

7563K7
7563K6

—

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7565K5

7564K6

7565K7

—

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac

2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7566K4

7566K5

7566K7

—

2PDT

ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
OFF
NONE

MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7568K3 1
7569K1
7570K4

7568K2 1
7569K2
7570K5

7568K4 1
7569K3
7570K7

—
—
—

2PDT

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7569K38

7569K36

7569K40

—

20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7630K38

7630K36

7630K40

—

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7632K38

7632K36

7632K40

—

4

Section A
10A 250 Vac;
15A 125 Vac,
3/4 hp 250 Vac,
4.2A L 125 Vac;
Section B
10A 250 Vac,
15A 125 Vac,
1/4 hp 250 Vac

2PDT

OFF

1 ON

2 ON

7571

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7571K2

7571K4

7571K6

—

4

20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120–240 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7803K11

2PDT

ON
ON
MOM. ON

OFF
NONE
OFF

ON
ON
MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7803K12
7803K32
7803K22 3 7803K42
7803K13
7803K33
7803K23 3 7803K43
7803K17 2 7803K37 2 7803K27 2 7803K47

4
4
4
4
4

4
4
7803K31

7803K21 2 7803K41

2

Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-13

4.4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Three-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in …

4

UP
Position

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

DOWN
Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1 hp, 3 Ph
125–600 Vac
1 hp, 1 and 2 Ph
125–480 Vac

3PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7700K1

7700K2

7700K3

—

3PDT

ON
ON

OFF
NONE

ON
ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7701K1
7702K1

7701K2
7702K2

7701K3
7702K3

—
—

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

3PDT

MOM. ON
MOM. ON

OFF
NONE

ON
ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7704K1
7705K1

7704K2
7705K2

7704K3
7705K3

—
—

20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 120 Vac
1, 2 and 3 Ph

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7804K12

7804K32 2 7804K22 2 7804K42 2

Rating

4

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in
Screw
Spade
CombiTerminals Terminals Term

24

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Four-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

4

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position

Catalog Number

4

Rating

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

4

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

4PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7691K14

7690K8

—

—

4PDT

ON
ON

OFF
NONE

ON
ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7693K2
7695K5

7692K13
7694K4

—
—

—
—

20A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac

4PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7933K38

7933K36

7933K40

—

4PDT

ON
ON

OFF
NONE

ON
ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7934K38
7935K38

7934K36
7935K36

7934K40
7935K40

—
—

20A, 125 Vac
4PDT
10A, 250 Vac
1 hp, 125–240 Vac
2 and 3 Ph

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7805K12 2 7805K32 2 7805K22 2 7805K42 2

4
4
4
4

Poles
and
Throw

Bushing
Lever
Length “A” Length “B” Solder
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in
Screw
Spade
CombiTerminals Terminals Term

Notes
1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.
2 Not CSA Certified.
3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.
4
1 hp at 240–480 Vac single- or two-phase and 240–600 Vac three-phase.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Single-Pole
Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position
Rating

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

4

Catalog Number
DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Solder
Lugs

Screw
Terminals

0.250 in
Spade
Terminals

10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7506K20

7506K21

1PDT

MOM. ON
ON
ON

OFF
NONE
OFF

MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—
—
—

7509K20
7510K20
7508K20

7509K21
7510K21
7508K21

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125V–250 Vac

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7501K22

7500K20 2

7501K21

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7502K20

7503K21

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7504K20 2

7505K21

4
4
4
4
4
4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw
ON

NONE

Catalog Number
DOWN
Position

4

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Solder
Lugs

Screw
Terminals

0.250 in
Spade
Terminals

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7560K20

7561K21

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7562K20

7563K21

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7564K20

7565K21

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
1/2 hp, 250 Vac

2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—

7566K20

7566K21

2PDT

ON
MOM. ON
ON

OFF
OFF
NONE

MOM. ON
MOM. ON
MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

—
—
—

7568K20 2
7569K20
7570K20

7568K21 2
7569K21
7570K21

4
4
4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

4
4
4
4
4

Catalog Number
DOWN
Position

4

4

AC Rated Special Circuit Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

Rating

4

4

AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

Rating

4

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Solder
Lugs

Screw
Terminals

0.250 in
Spade
Terminals

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

2PDT

2-3, 5-6

OFF

2-6, 5-3

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7563K24

7562K23

7563K25

15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

2-3, 5-6

NONE

2-6, 5-3

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7565K24

7564K23

7565K25

4
4
4
4
4

Notes
1 Seal is lever seal only and is dust and splash resistant. Panel seal is available, Part Number 32-341.
2 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.

4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-15

4.4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4

Technical Data and Specifications

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated
Description

Specification

4

Ratings

See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

4

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-brake butt contact

Terminal types

Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32x 3/16 binding head (Cat. No. 811-2) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—tintillate-plated brass
Spade terminals—combi-term—brass

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1), except 7700–7705, which have bright nickel hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2)
Furnished unassembled

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

4
4
4
4
4
4

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Operating temperature
range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4

Contact Material

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series Switches
3 to 6

Silver-plated copper

Silver-plated copper

4

10 to 20

Silver-plated copper with silver buttons

Silver-plated copper with silver buttons

4

20 to 30

Silver-plated copper with cad oxide buttons

Copper with cad oxide buttons

7800 Series Switches
3 to 6

Silver-plated copper

Silver-plated copper

10 to 20

Copper with silver buttons

Copper with silver buttons

4

Ampere

Movable

Stationary

4
4

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series

4

1PST Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)

4
4

B

4

A

0.625
(15.87)
0.300
(7.62)

4
4

1.125
(28.57)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

0.469
(11.91)

4

1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

0.469
(11.91)

B
0.625
(15.87)

1.047
(26.59)

1.218
(30.93)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-16

A

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.100
(27.95)
0.440
(11.17)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

4.4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
2PDT Maintained (Solder Lugs)

4

2PDT Maintained (Spade Terminals)

4

28°

28°
15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

14°

14°

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

B

1.312
(33.32)

A

4
B

1.312
(33.32)
0.469
(11.91)

A

0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79)
0.750
(19.05)

1.031
(26.18)

0.469
(11.91)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.270
(6.85)

0.440
(11.17)

36°

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

B

0.270
(6.86)

1.047
(26.59)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.562
(14.27)

1.312
(33.32)

0.469
(11.91)
0.750 0.797
(19.05) (20.24)

1.125
(28.57)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

0.910
(23.11)

0.300
(7.62)

2PDT Momentary (Spade Terminals)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
B

A

1.062
(26.97)

0.300
(7.62)

4

0.910
(23.11)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.440
(11.18)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4
4

4
4

0.469
(11.91)

0.750
(19.05)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4

4
0.562
(14.27)

1.312
(33.32)

0.469
(11.91)

4

4

18°

14°

0.797
(20.24)

4

4

36°

1.312
(33.32)

4

4
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

28°

0.750 (19.05)
0.740 (18.79)

4

4

A

0.625
(15.87)

4

4

18°

0.469
(11.91)

4

4

2PDT Momentary (Screw Terminals)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

4

4

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

1.200
(30.48)

4

4
4
4
4

V11-T4-17

4.4
4
4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued
3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)

31°

15.5°

4

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
1.312
(33.32)

0.562
(14.27)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

0.688
(17.47)
0.469 (11.91)
1.265
(32.13)

1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)

0.469
(11.91)

0.750
(19.05)

1.333 (33.85)
Max.

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

0.300
(7.62)

0.910
(23.11)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)
0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

0.270
(6.85)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.688
(17.47)
0.469
(11.91)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)

4

15.5°

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

4

1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.688 0.469
(17.47) (11.91)

0.965
(24.51)

4

0.300 (7.62)

4

1.225
(31.11)

1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)

31°

4
4

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

4

4

1.437
(36.49)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

18°

4
4

0.469
(11.91)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)
36°

4
4

0.440
(11.17)

2PDT Momentary (Solder Lugs)

4

0.688
(17.47)

0.965
(24.51)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

0.270
(6.85)

4

4

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4

4

1.333 (33.85)
Max.

1.437
(36.49)

0.965
(24.51)

4

15.5°

1.333 (33.85)
Max.
0.688 0.469
(17.47) (11.91)

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)

4

4

3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)

31°

4
4

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4
4

Toggle Switches

1.333 (33.85)
Max.
1.437
(36.49)

Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)
Keyway
0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D
(1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.688
(17.47)
0.469 (11.91)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

1.437 1.546
(36.49) (39.26)

4

15/32−32 Thd.
0.469 (11.91)
1.405
(35.68)
0.440 (11.17)

1.333 (33.85)
Max.

4
4
V11-T4-18

0.270
(6.85)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7800 Series
2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)
Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.671
(17.04)

4

4PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

4

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)

4

0.687
(17.45)

15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)

4

0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)

0.469
(11.91)

0.469
(11.91)

0.812
(20.62)

4
4

0.812
(20.62)

1.312
0.234 (33.32)
(5.94)

0.750
(19.05)

4

0.234
(5.54)

4

1.437 (36.50)

1.296 (32.92)

4
2PDT Maintained (Combi-Terminals)

4

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.671
(17.04)

4

3PDT Maintained (0.25 in Spade Terminals)

4

0.687
(17.45)

15/32-32
(11.91 TPI)

4

0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)

0.469
(11.91)

0.469
(11.91)

0.812
(20.62)

4
4

0.812
(20.62)

4

0.440
(11.17)

0.375
(9.53)
1.312
(33.32)

0.750
(19.05)

1.296 (32.92)

0.031 (0.78)
Ref.

4

1.437 (36.50)

4
3PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

4

Combi-Term Termination Options

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D
(2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)
0.687
(17.45)

4
4

0.469 (11.91) TPI
(15/32−32)

0.469
(11.91)

4
4

0.812
(20.62)
0.218
(5.54)

Solder
1.296 (32.92)

Quick Connect

4

Screw

4

1.437 (36.50)

4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-19

4.5
4

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Contents

General Purpose Toggles

Description

4

Page

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

V11-T4-21
V11-T4-21

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description
This line of switches employs
a quick-make/quick-break
contact mechanism. The
resultant high-speed
movement eliminates the
“teasing” of the switch and
reduces the pitting of the

Options
contact surfaces due to
arcing. Self-cleaning and
wiping contact action assures
positive contact on switch
operation. These switches
are especially suited for use
in small motor applications.

●
●
●

●

Standards and
Certifications

Lever—11/16 in
Lever seal
Mounting hardware;
furnished assembled
Other lead lengths

●
●
●

Note
1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

4
4

UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS Compliant 1

Product Selection

4

AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole

4
4

Rating

Poles
and
Throw

3A, 250 Vdc

1PST

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST
3A, 250 Vdc

4
4

1PDT

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position

Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Catalog Number
Solder
Lugs

Screw
Terminals

Wire
Leads

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)

0.500 (12.70)

8280K115

8295K107

8290K115

ON
ON
MOM. ON

NONE
NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF
OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)

8381K107
8381K108
8928K478

8396K107
8396K108
—

8391K107
8391K108
—

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70)

8928K479

—

—

Base Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

Bushing
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Catalog Number
Solder
Lugs

Screw
Terminals

Wire
Leads

4
4

AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

4

Rating

4

7A, 125V
3A, 250 Vdc

4
4

Poles
and
Throw

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position

2PST

ON
MOM. ON

NONE
NONE

OFF
OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)
0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)

8370K107
8928K481 1

8372K107
8928K482 1

8371K107
—

2PDT

ON
ON

NONE
NONE

ON
ON

D

0.344 (8.74)
0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70)
0.500 (12.70)

8373K108
8373K107

8375K108
8375K107

8374K108
8374K107

Note
1 Rating: 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc and 3A, 250 Vdc.

4
4
V11-T4-20

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.5

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Technical Data and Specifications

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

4

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection table; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT
Maintained and momentary toggle action

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action

Contact material

Bronze silver-plated

Terminal types

Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #5-40 x 5/32 in (Cat. No. 11-26) screws
Furnished unassembled
Solder lug terminals—brass silver-plated with 0.085–0.090 in (2.16–2.29 mm) dia. hole
Integrated wire leads—18 gauge, 6 in long and skinned 3/4 in
Special wire leads lengths beyond 6 in are available at additional charge

4
4
4
4
4

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled
facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1)
Furnished unassembled

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4
4
4
4

Dimensions

4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8280K115
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)

8290K115
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.500
(12.70)

8295K107
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)
Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.500
(12.70)

0.532
(13.51)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

1.093
(27.78)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)
D

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

BC

A
B

B C

C
0.200
(5.08)

0.562
(14.28)

0.046
(1.19)

0.562
(14.28)

0.968
(24.60)
1.250
(31.75)
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw

Standard 6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads

4

A

4

B

0.046
(1.19)

0.562
(14.28)

0.968
(24.60)

0.968
(24.60)
0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

A

A

4
4

D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

4
4

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

D
D

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

4

0.671
(17.06)
1.000
(25.40)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

4

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.500
(12.70)

1.000
(25.40)

1.000
(25.40)

4

8381K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Solder Lug)

C

0.687
(17.46)

4
4

0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole

0.203
(5.15)

4
4
4

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.411
(35.84)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.406
(35.71)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.406
(35.71)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.531
(38.89)

29-1/2°

4

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.656
(42.06)

25-1/2°

4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-21

4.5
4
4

8391K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)

C

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

A

0.685
(17.39)

B

A
B

C

C
0.687
(17.46)

1.093
(27.78)

0.950
(24.13)

Standard
6.000 (152.40)
Long Wire Leads

4

4

D

A
B

4

4

0.242 (6.14) Dia.
D

15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

4

1.156
(29.36)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

4

4

0.690
(17.52)
1.390
(35.32)

D

4

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.671
(17.06)

0.240 (6.09)

4

8928K478
1PST Momentary
(Solder Lug)

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.664
(16.86)

4

4

8396K107 and K108
1PST Maintained
(Screw Terminals)

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

4

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4
4

Toggle Switches

1.093
(27.78)

0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole

#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.531
(38.89)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.531
(38.89)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.980
(50.29)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.656
(42.06)

25-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.656
(42.06)

25-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.656
(42.06)

25-1/2°

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-22

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches
General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

8370 and 8373K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Solder Lug)

8371 and 8374K107 and
K108
1PST Maintained
(Wire Lead)

8373 and 8375K107 and
K108
2PST/2PDT Maintained
(Screw Terminals)

4

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

4

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide

Keyway
0.035 (0.88) Deep
0.068 (1.72) Wide
0.687
(17.46)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

4
4

1.156
(29.37)
1.656 (42.07)

1.156
(29.36)

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

4

0.687
(17.46)

0.687
(17.46)

1.156
(29.36)

4.5

4
4

These Terminals Omitted on
Single-Throw Switches

D

D
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

15/32 Dia.32 Thds.

D

A
B
B
C

0.640
(16.27)

4

0.245 (6.22)
Dia.
0.239 (6.07)

A

4

C
15/32 Dia.−
32 Thds.

1.080 (27.43)

B C

0.873 (22.17)
0.830 (21.08)
1.000 (25.40)

0.090 (2.28)
0.085 (2.15)
Dia. Hole

0.281
Double-Throw (7.14)

Two Solder Lugs
Omitted for
Single-Throw

4

A

4

0.640
(16.27)

4

1.093
(27.78)
#5/40 x 5/32 Lg.
Binding Head Screw

4

0.343
(8.73)

4

Single-Throw
“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

“A”
Lever
Dim.

“B”
Bushing
Dim.

“C”
Overall
Dim.

“D”
Throw
Dim.

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.694
(43.03)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.484
(37.69)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.344
(8.74)

1.484
(37.69)

29-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.820
(46.23)

25-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.515
(38.48)

25-1/2°

0.500
(12.70)

0.469
(11.91)

1.609
(40.87)

25-1/2°

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-23

4.6
4

Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles

Contents

X Series Toggles

Description

4

Page

X Series Toggles
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4

V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-25
V11-T4-26

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description
Eaton’s new, competitively
priced, AC rated X Series
toggles offer a standard high
rating for both single- and
two-pole applications. The
new X Series toggle line
offers a wide range of
switching circuits, functions
and accessories. Ratings for
single- and two-pole include
20A at 125 Vac and 10A at
277 Vac to handle more
severe inductive, motor and
lamp loads.
In addition, X Series toggles
have a high standard horsepower rating of 1-1/2 hp,
125–250 Vac for two-pole
applications.

Application Description
The easy-to-install toggles
also have an industrystandard 0.48 in diameter
mounting hole. For added
convenience and delivery
support, select industrystandard switch circuit part
numbers are available from
stock. With so many
features, X Series toggles
can be used in a variety of
applications.

●

●
●

●
●

●
●

●
●

Commercial and industrial
equipment
Household appliances
Industrial machinery and
automation
Medical equipment
Military communications
and surveillance
Rail systems
Signaling and
communications
Test and lab equipment
Telecommunications, cable
and broadcasting

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-24

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL Recognized component
for Canada File E2702
RoHS Compliant 1

Note
1
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

4.6

Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles

Product Selection

4

Single-Pole 1

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
Poles and
Throw

UP
Position

CENTER
Position

DOWN
Position 2

Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade

Screw

Solder Lugs

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

XTD1A1A2

XTD1A2A2

XTD1A3A2

1PST

ON 3

NONE

OFF

XTD1F1A2

XTD1F2A2

XTD1F3A2

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

XTD2B1A

XTD2B2A

XTD2B3A

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

XTD2C1A

XTD2C2A

XTD2C3A

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON 3

XTD2D1A

XTD2D2A

XTD2D3A

OFF

ON

3

XTD2E1A

XTD2E2A

XTD2E3A

OFF

ON 3

XTD2G1A

XTD2G2A

XTD2G3A

1PDT

ON

1PDT

ON

3

4
4
4
4
4
4

Two-Pole 4
Circuit with Toggle in …

4

DOWN
Position 2

Terminal Type—Catalog Number
0.250 in Spade

Screw

Solder Lugs

NONE

OFF

XTD3A1A2

XTD3A2A2

XTD3A3A2

NONE

OFF

XTD3F1A2

XTD3F2A2

XTD3F3A2

ON

OFF

ON

XTD4B1A

XTD4B2A

XTD4B3A

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

XTD4C1A

XTD4C2A

XTD4C3A

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON 3

XTD4D1A

XTD4D2A

XTD4D3A

2PDT

ON 3

OFF

ON 3

XTD4E1A

XTD4E2A

XTD4E3A

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON 3

XTD4G1A

XTD4G2A

XTD4G3A

Poles and
Throw

UP
Position

CENTER
Position

2PST

ON

2PST

ON 3

2PDT

4
4
4
4
4

Notes
1 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.
2 Keyway position.
3 Indicates momentary position.
4 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 1-1/2 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.

4
4

Accessories

4

See Accessories on Page V11-T4-31.

4

Technical Data and Specifications

4

X Series Toggles
Description

Specification

Single-pole rating

20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 3/4 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc

Two-pole rating

20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 1-1/2 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc

Available circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT

Terminal types

Brass screw, brass solder lugs, brass nickel-plated 0.250 in spade

Hardware included

Zinc nickel-plated knurl nut, zinc nickel-plated hex nut

Mounting means

Threaded bushing 12.0 +0.1, –0 mm; 16.5 +1, –1 mm

Keyway

1.8 mm located in DOWN position

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Contact resistance

50 ohm maximum

Dielectric strength

AC 1500V, 1 minute

Operating temperature

32° to 149°F (0° to 65°C)

Insulation resistance

DC 500V 100M ohm minute

Seal level rating

IP40

Packaging

Sealed in polybag labeled with part number

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-25

4.6
4
4

Toggle Switches
X Series Toggles

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole

Two-Pole

4

Keyway

4

0.629 ± 0.012
(16.00 ± 0.30)

1.299 ± 0.019
(33.00 ± 0.50)

ø0.236 ± 0.012
(ø6.0 ± 0.30)

4
B

4

C

4
4
4
4

0.063 ± 0.004
(1.60 ± 0.10)
0.433 ± 0.003
(11.00 ± 0.10)

C

D
3

2

1

6

5

4

15/32-32 NS-2A

4
4

ø0.236 ± 0.007
(ø6.00 ± 0.20)

B

D

4

ø0.472 +0.003/–0.000
(ø12.00 +0.10/–0.00)

A

A

4
4

Mounting Hole

0.748 ± 0.019
(19.00 ± 0.50)

1.125 ± 0.012
(28.60 ± 0.30)

4
4

Keyway

A 0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)

A 0.649 ± 0.039
(16.50 ± 1.00)

B 0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)

B 0.468 ± 0.012
(11.90 ± 0.30)

C 0.677 ± 0.019
(17.20 ± 0.50)

C 0.740 ± 0.019
(18.80 ± 0.50)

D 0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)

D 0.452 ± 0.019
(11.50 ± 0.50)

15/32-32 NS-2A

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-26

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4.7

Contents

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Description

Page

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-28
V11-T4-29
V11-T4-29

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Product Description
One-Hole Panel Mount
These heavy duty toggle
switches are available in
either two- or three-position.
The three-position switches
offer a unique positive center
stop feature, which assures
that the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
This design feature is a major
factor in their widespread
acceptance for motor
reversing and speed control
applications.

Flush Mount
The most common
application for the switch is to
help prevent motor damage
resulting from the high
current generation by counter
EMF of the armature at the
time of reversing. This type of
device is referred to within
the industry as an antiplugging, hesitation, positive
stop or positive off switch.
Typical applications include
bench tools, coach and truck
(electric lift) and X-ray
equipment.

These three-position
switches also offer the
positive center stop feature
where the lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping.
The high ratings of this series
allow it to be used with a
broad range of heavy duty
applications. Copper contacts
and brass screw terminals
are standard.

4

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL Recognized
(except where noted)
CSA Certified
(where noted)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-27

4.7
4

Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Product Selection
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—One-Hole Panel Mount

4

Circuit with Toggle in …

4

UP
Position

4
4
4
4
4

DOWN
Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base
Circuit
See Page
V11-T4-35

15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7992K11

7992K10

7992K12

15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7991K11

7991K10

7991K12

15A, 125 Vac 1
10A, 250 Vac
3/4 hp, 250 Vac

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7990K11

7990K10

7990K12

Rating

4

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw 2

Bushing
Length “A”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Length “B”
Inches (mm)

Lever
Type

Solder
Screw
Terminals Lugs

0.250 in
Spade
Terminals

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—Flush Mount

4

Circuit with Toggle in …
UP
Position

4

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

Lever
Type

Termination
Type

Catalog
Number

NONE
OFF

ON
ON

Square
Square

Screw
Screw

7810K1
7810K2 34

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7811K5 35

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7812K2

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7813K2

4

Rating

4

20A, 125 Vac/Vdc
10A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PDT

ON
ON

4

30A, 125 Vac/Vdc
20A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PDT

4

CENTER
Position

Poles
and
Throw

Notes
1 Listed rating for 125 Vac also applies at 28 Vdc.
2 Supplied in a four-pole base.
3 CSA Certified.
4 Also rated 5A, 600 Vac; 1-1/2 hp, 250 Vdc; 2 hp, 240 Vac.
5 Also rated 2 hp, 250 Vac/Vdc.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-28

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches
Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4.7

Technical Data and Specifications

4

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

Circuits

2PDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; maintained action

Contact mechanism
One-hole panel mount

4
4

AC rated devices—slow-make/Slow-break butt contact
AC/DC rated devices—Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts

Flush mount

4

Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts

Contact material
One-hole panel mount

4

AC rated devices:
Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
AC/DC rated devices:
Movable—copper
Stationary—bronze

Flush mount
Terminal types
Mounting means
One-hole panel mount

Flush mount

4
4

Movable—copper
Stationary—copper

4

Screw terminals—brass

4

AC rated devices:
Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in
Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provide anti-rotation feature
Hardware supplied—
1 hexagon locknut (Catalog Number 15-192) and 1 hex facenut (Catalog Number 15-966-6)
Furnished unassembled

4
4
4

Flush mounting panel tabs

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4
4

Dimensions

4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

One-Hole Panel Mount

4

7990K10—4PDT

4

32˚
0.430 (10.92)

4

15/32−32 Thds.
0.690
(17.53)
1.450 (36.83)
Max.

1.550 (39.37)
Max.

4

0.470
(11.94)

0.070
(1.78)

1.320
(33.53)

4

0.300
(7.62)

4

0.970
(24.64)

4
4
4

6−32 x 0.188 (4.77)
Binding Head Screw

4
4
4
4
4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-29

4.7
4
4

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Flush Mount
7810K2—2PDT

4

7811K2—2PDT
3.781 (96.04)

4
4

Toggle Switches

3.781 (96.04)
3.281 (83.34)

3.281 (83.34)

0.968
(24.59)

1.312
(33.34)

4
4

1.593
(40.46)

4
4

3.781
(96.04)

1.859
(47.22)

1.593
(40.46)

4

2.937
(74.60)

4
4

7813K2—4PDT

4

3.781 (96.04)

4

3.281 (83.34)

4

3.281
(83.34)

1.312
(33.34)

4
4

1.890
(48.01)

4
4
4

2.937
(74.60)

0.406
(10.31)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-30

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.812
(46.02)

Toggle Switches
Accessories

4.8

Mounting Hardware

4

Product Description
One-Hole Mounting Switches
All bushing mounted
switches are furnished with
two mounting nuts. One nut
is mounted behind the panel
to prevent the bushing sleeve
from being distorted if the
front panel is overtightened

4
4

Eaton accepts no
responsibility for damage to
switches mounted without
the backup nuts.

4
4
4
4

Product Selection

4

Mounting Hardware for One-Hole Mounting Switches—Mounting Nuts 1

Size

Description

Material

Thickness
Dim. “A” in
Inches (mm)

3/8-27

Hexagon locknut

Nickel-plated brass

0.125 (3.18)

Inside
Diameter
Dim “B” in
Inches (mm)

OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C” in
Inches (mm)

Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D” in
Inches (mm)

Catalog
Number

—

0.562 (14.27)

0.625 (15.88)

15-2526-2

3/8-24

Bright nickel-plated brass

11/32-32

Nickel-plated brass

0.063 (1.60)

—

0.473 (12.01)

0.531 (13.49)

15-1525-2

Zinc-chromate treated

0.075 (1.91)

—

0.625 (15.88)

—

15-192

Bright nickel-plated brass

0.078 (1.98)

—

0.546 (13.87)

0.625 (15.88)

15-2525-58

Zinc-chromate treated

0.188 (4.76)

0.783 (19.89)

1.125 (25.80)

—

15-2528-2

Nickel-plated brass

0.078 (1.98)

—

0.562 (14.27)

0.656 (16.66)

15-966-2

0.562 (14.27)

—

15-124F1

15/32-32

Hexagon locknut

Hexagon facenut

—

Semi-lustre nickel-plated brass
Knurled facenut

Bright nickel-plated brass

—
0.066 (1.68)

Black cupric oxide-plated brass

Chamfered dress nut

15-1525-6

—

19-966-6

—

15-124F5

Brass nickel-plated brass

0.109 (2.77)

—
—

0.625 (15.88)

—

15-90

Bright nickel-plated brass

0.151 (3.84)

0.312 (7.92)

0.687 (17.45)

—

15-994-2

Standard knurl nut with shoulder

Nickel-plated brass

0.109 (2.77)

—

0.593 (15.06)

—

15-2534-14

Dress nut

Satin chrome-plated brass

0.125 (3.18)

—

0.562 (14.27)

—

15-2523-4

Black nylon

0.187 (4.75)

0.390 (9.91)

0.640 (16.26)

—

15-1048-3

Knurled dress nut

Chrome-plated brass

0.187 (4.75)

0.312 (7.92)

0.640 (16.26)

—

15-189-5

3/4-32

Hexagon facenut

Nickel-plated steel

0.093 (2.36)

—

0.937 (23.80)

1.078 (27.38)

15-1043

#8-40

Hexagon locknut with facenut

Nickel-plated steel

0.060 (1.52)

—

0.245 (6.22)

0.216 (5.49)

15-1047

Note
1
Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. Minimum ordering quantity on all items is 100.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-31

4.8
4
4
4
4
4

Toggle Switches
Accessories

Mounting Washers and Locking Ring 1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Size

Description

Material

Thickness
Dim. “A”

For 15/32 bushing

Locking ring

Zinc-plated steel

0.040 (1.02)

Inside Diameter
Dim “B”

OD or Dimension
Across Flats
Dim. “C”

Dimension
Across Corners
Dim. “D”

Catalog
Number

0.475 (12.07)

0.718 (18.24)

—

29-761-5

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

Mounting Hardware

4

Hexagon Locknuts
or Facenuts

Knurled Nut
with Shoulder

Knurled Facenut

Chamfered Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-994-2

Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-189-5

4
4
4

4
4

B

C

C

A

A

Knurled Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-1048-3

Dress Nut
Catalog No. 15-2523-4

4

Internal Tooth
Lockwasher

Plain Washer

Locking Ring
0.063 (1.60)

B

B

0.475
(12.07)

0.043 (1.09)

B

B
0.109 (2.77)

4
4

A

A

4
4

C

C

C

A

4
4

B

D

C

C
A

C
A

C
A

A

Note
1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V11-T4-32

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

0.031
(0.79)
0.031
(0.79)

0.050
(1.27)
0.719 (18.26)

Toggle Switches
Accessories

Decorator Facenuts
Product Selection

1

Replacement Terminal Screws

4

Product Selection

4

Type

Color

Catalog Number

Screw Size

Catalog Number 2

Knurled facenuts

Bright black
Bright clear

15-1048-3
15-1048-7

#5-40 x 1/8 in

11-1117
11-26

Bright black
Bright clear

15-1049-3
15-1049-7

#5-40 x 5/32 in
#5-40 x 3/16 in binding head

811-7206

#5-40 x 1/4 in binding head

811-14

Beveled facenuts

811-2

#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head

811-161

#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head

811-7248

Catalog Number 15-1048

#6-32 x 1/4 in pan head, brass

11-1893

#6-32 x 3/8 in binding head

811-129

#8-32 x 3/16 in binding head

11-1618

#8-32 x 1/4 in

11-1369

#8-32 x 1/4 in

811-408-2

#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head

11-1766

#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head

11-6074-4

#6-32 x 7/32 in binding head

11-6085-2

0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole

0.438 (11.13)
Dia. Hole
0.625
(15.88)
Dia.

0.625
(15.88)
Dia.

0.060
(1.63)

20˚

●

●

●

●
●

●
●

Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering panel
enclosure
Behind panel mounting
Stainless-steel cup washer ensures proper seating of silicone
rubber seal
Seal withstands 20 psi water pressure
Cat. No. 32-341

0.072
0.082
0.467
Dia.
0.472
0.427
0.432

Silicone
Rubber

4
4
4
4
4
4

●
●

Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering lever to
bushing enclosure
Front panel mounting
Threaded mounting nut ensures proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot
Brass nut: 15/32-32 NS-2A
Black color

SW1RY3030

Dimensions—32-341
1/16-Inch Lettering
(located on angular surface)

4

Toggle Boot
●

Panel Seal

4
4

#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog Number 15-1049

4.8

Product Selection
Mounting Description

Color

Catalog
Number

Front panel mounting
Molded in brass mounting nut
(15/32-32 NS-2A) ensures
proper assembly of silicon
rubber boot

Black

SW1RY3030

0.670
Dia.
0.650
Thickness of brushing
seal is reduced to 0.080
when mounted to panel

0.030
(0.80)

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

0.940 (24.00)
0.120 (3.00)

Cupwasher
Stainless Steel

4

4

Dimensions—15/32-32 NS-2A

0.105
0.120

4

4

0.660
(16.70)

4
4

Ø0.643
(Ø16.34)

4

Ø0.330
(Ø8.40)

4

Inner Thread 15/32-32 NS-2A

4

Notes
1 Decorator facenuts for 15/32 in bushing switches, 15/32-32 thread.
2 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.

4
4
4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-33

4.8
4

Toggle Switches
Accessories

Indicating Plates
Product Selection—Indicating Plates for 15/32-Inch Bushing Mounted Switches

4
4
4

Keyway Location

Marking
Opposite
Keyway

Keyway
Side

Material

Finish

Catalog Number

Keyway on bottom

ON

OFF

0.032 in steel

Plain

30-5632

Statuary bronze

30-5632-3

Burnished nickel

30-5632-4

0.032 in brass

Black cupric oxide 1

30-2899-3

0.032 in steel

Statuary bronze

30-5632-7

Burnished nickel

30-5632-6

Burnished nickel

30-5632-11

4
4

RAD

4

RUN

START

HOT

COLD

30-5632-15

4

HI

LOW

30-5632-16

4

ON

STOP

FOR

REV

4

AUTO

TEST

30-2899-6

PUSH

START

30-2899-7

4

RUN

TEST

BLANK

BLANK

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-8

ON

OFF

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-13

OFF

ON

4

Keyway on side

4

Keyway on top

4
4
4

Keyway on top

PHO

0.032 in steel

30-5632-17
0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-2899-2

30-2899-9

30-2899-8

T

B

OFF

ON

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-12
30-5632-14

SET

RUN

30-2899-10

BLANK

RESET

O

I

I

O

30-2899-12
0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-23
30-5632-19

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches
Indicating Plate
ON
1
16

15 Dia.
32

1
32

OFF

1

11
32
5 Dia.
8

Note
1 White lettering.

4
4
4
4
V11-T4-34

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.9

Toggle Switches
Technical Data

SinglePole

TwoPole

FourPole

1
2
3

1
2
3

4
5
6

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9

Terminal Identification

Toggle Circuit Diagrams

When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.

Circuit Letter

All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.

10
11
12

“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram
For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON
special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect
wiring per instructions given below.
ON-ON-ON Special Circuit
Connection Points
Connect common to terminals

2

Connect circuit “A” to terminals

6

Connect circuit “B” to terminals

4

Connect circuit “C” to terminals

1

A
1PST

B
1PDT

C
2PST

D
2PDT

No. of
Poles
Circuit A

1 PDT

1

3

6

4
4
4
4

L
2PST

4
5
6

2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12

7 10
8 11
9 12

1 4
2 5
3 6

G3
1PST

4

M
2PST

2

4

4

1

3

4

2 4

4

1 3

4

N6
2PDT

4
4
4

P
1PDT

2
CENTER
Position
(Maintained)

Circuit B

DOWN
Position
(Keyway)

H4
1PDT

2
3

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

6

4

5

6

Circuit Diagrams

4

6
4

Circuit C

1

Q7
2 Circuit

6

B
A

C
C

4
NC NO
H
G
NC
NO

4
4

Toggle Switch Type

Special General Purpose Toggle Circuits
Circuit Number

Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever

4
4

Center terminal and switch lever

A

Bulb

4

Momentary contact

B
7571

A
B
7555

4

Toggle Switch Legend
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever

7530

4

Legends
Legend

Schematic

4

K
1PDT

3

UP
Position

4

4

1
2
3

E
4PST 1

1

J
1PST

5
6

2
3

4

Schematic

I
2 Circuit 5

1
2
3

Circuit with Lever in …
3 ON
Independent

Circuit Letter

2
3

F
4PDT 2

Single-Pole

Schematic

4

Denotes mechanical contact portion
Notes
1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3 Dependent lamp.
4 Independent lamp.
5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two
circuits being controlled may be independent of each other.
6
For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

4
4
4
4

A

4

B

4
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-35

Dimmers and Wipers
Slide Control

5.1

Paddle and Slide Controls
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2

Paddle Control

V11-T5-2
V11-T5-2
V11-T5-3
V11-T5-3

5
5
5

Rotary Wipers
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-4
V11-T5-5
V11-T5-6

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Rotary Wiper

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-1

5.1
5

Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls

Contents

Paddle and Slide Controls

Description

5

Page

Paddle and Slide Controls
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-3
V11-T5-3

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Product Description
Eaton’s unique family of
dimmer and wiper controls
are field proven to be the
market’s most dependable
controls. Although originally
designed for the heavy truck
market, applications in
various other types of

vehicles exist. Paddle and
slide versions are available
and both have the look, feel
and durability associated with
our controls. Bezels and
actuators are molded in a soft
matte finish. Illuminated and
non-illuminated versions are

available. Board-mounted
LEDs located behind a laseretched panel provide
illumination. Customized light
panel lettering and custom
pad printed bezels are also
available. Both dimmer
and wiper controls are

designed to complement the
NGR family of switches.
Note: Specific frame options are
available that allow product to
mount in NGR gang mount
system. Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative.

5

Catalog Number Selection

5

How To Order—Paddle and Slide Controls

5

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

5
5
5

Control Type
D = Dimmer
W = Wiper
Actuator Type
P = Paddle
S = Slide

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Application
Voltage
12 = 12V
24 = 24V

D

Amperage Rating
and Voltage 1
3
4
5
6
8
10
W

= 3A, 24V
= 4A, 12V
= 5A, 24V
= 6A, 12V
= 8A, 12V
= 10A, 12V
= Wiper

P 24
Bezel Print
Style
A = Style A
B = Style B
C = Style C
D = Style D

5 C

A

Connector Type
Packard No.
A = 12020398
B = 12015345
C = 174930-1
D = 12034295
E = Leads only

D

G

Connector and Leads
Only Detail
Dimmer connector
Dimmer and wiper connector
Dimmer connector
Wiper connector
Dimmer only

Bezel Print Style 4
PANEL

B
R
I
G
H
T
D
I
M

Code A

WIPER
W
I
P
E
R
O
F
F

W
A
S
H

PANEL
0
1
2

Code B

Code C

Code D

Notes
1 Amperage ratings for dimmers only.
2 Maximum dwell time describes the average time constant for delayed wiper activation.
3 Maximum nominal dwell.
4 Custom pad print available for bezel or button.

V11-T5-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Circuit Board 2
D = Dimmer
L = 18 sec. 3
S = 10 sec. 3

G
Y
R
X

LED Color
= Green
= Yellow
= Red
= Nonilluminated

5.1

Dimmers and Wipers
Paddle and Slide Controls

Technical Data and Specifications

5

Paddle and Slide Controls
Description

Specification

5

Ratings (dimmer only)

4, 6, 8, 10A at 14 Vdc
3, 5A at 28 Vdc

5

Mechanical life

100,000 operations, maximum

Operating temperature range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

5

Base material

High-grade thermoplastic molding material

Mounting means

Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Mounting hole

Rectangular panel cutout: 1.734 x 0.867 in (44.00 x 22.00 mm)

5

Panel thickness
Paddle

0.030 to 0.190 in (0.762 x 4.80 mm)

5

Slide

5

0.030 to 0.080 in (0.762 x 2.03 mm)

Approximate weight

5

1.5 oz

5

Dimensions

5

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Paddle Control
1.960
(49.78)

R 0.156 Typ
(R 3.96)

5

B
R
I
G
H
T

D
I
M

Lettering to be white.
Lettering style to be
Helvetica Swiff Condensed 14 pt.

WIPER

PANEL

W
I
P
E
R

O
F
F

1.024
(26.01)

5

Slide Control

0.675
1.024
(17.15)
(26.01)

5

W
A
S
H

0.448
(11.38)
1.663
(42.24)

Symbol and lettering to be stamped in white.
“WIPER” and “WASH” lettering style
to be 12 pt. Univers 59.
OFF lettering to be 10 pt. Univers 59.
Custom lettering is also available.

0.100
(2.54)

50° ± 5°
0.214
(5.44)

1.332
(33.83)
1.582
(40.18)

5

Blue

0.454
(11.53)

0.100
(2.54)

5

0.800
(20.32)

1.019 ± 0.020
(25.88 ± 0.51)
1.718
(43.64)

5

R 0.080 Typ
(R 2.03)

R 0.090 Typ
(R 2.29)
0.857
(21.79)
2 Places

0.745
(18.92)

5

Black

1.965
(49.91)
See
Detail A

5

0.778 (19.76)
Travel

5
5

0.867 ± 0.005
(22.02 ± 0.13)

5

Black
0.320
(8.13)

White

Blue
Yellow

Terminal Identification:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Washer (white wire) washer only
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)

1.650
(41.91)

5

1.734 ± 0.005
(44.04 ± 0.127)

5

2.680
(68.07)

1.302
(33.07)

Yellow

5

Panel Opening

Blue

5

0.964 (24.49)
Ref

5

Black
Terminal Identification:
Positive (+) (blue wire)
Negative (–) (black wire)
Load (yellow wire)
Positive (+) LED light (blue wire)
Open position
Negative (–) LED light (black wire)

Detail A
Typ 2 Plcs

5

C of
Pivot
Point

5
5
5

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-3

5.2
5

Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers

Contents

Rotary Wiper

Description

5

Page

Rotary Wipers
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-5
V11-T5-6

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Product Description

Features

The rotary wiper has been
designed to be a highly
durable rotary wiper control
for the transportation
industry. The RW200 series
wiper has four wiper control

5

positions via a rotating knob:
Off, Intermittent, Continuous
Low Speed and Continuous
High Speed. The device has a
washer function that
operates the washer pump
and wiper while the knob is
depressed.

●

●

Options

Load Dump Protection
●
The switch will
withstand a 120V load
dump per SAE J1455
Reverse Voltage Protection
●
The device will not be
damaged when exposed
to 12 Vdc for 5 minutes

5
5

Product Selection

5

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the
appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

5

Rotary Wiper Code Numbers and Letters

5

Series

Code

Voltage

Code

5

12064752

5
5

Packard
Connectors

12977042
RW

RW

12 Vdc

6294544 and 2977048

5

12A

12B

200
6288538

5

Code

12C

12D

Bushing Length in
Inches (mm)

Code

Catalog Number

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012AA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012AB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012BA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012BB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012CA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012CB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012DA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012DB

5
5
5
5
5
V11-T5-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

●
●
●
●

Variable bushing length
Variable spindle length
Choice of connectors
Pad printing on knob

Standards and
Certifications
Meets SAE standards J1455,
J1944 and J1988.

Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers

5.2

Technical Data and Specifications

5

Rotary Wipers

5

Description

Specification

Operating voltage range

9 Vdc to 16 Vdc

Continuous load rating

17A from –40° to 73°F (–40° to 23°C)
Derated to 5A at 185°F (85°C)

Wiper electromechanical life

50,000 cycles

Electrical cycle life

250,000 cycles in the Intermittent position
300,000 cycles combined in the Low and High positions

Operating temperature

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Humidity rating

Device will operate properly at 98% humidity between –40° and 100°F (–40° and 38°C)

Mechanical shock

The switch will withstand a 3 ft drop on concrete

5

Vibration

The device will operate properly while being exposed to 133 hours of 1G rms vibration
along all three axes, sweeping from 5 Hz to 1500 Hz at one octave per minute

5

5
5
5
5

5

Connector Drawings

5
5
5
5
12064752

12977042

5

6288538

5
5
5
5
2977048

6294544

Circuit Continuity

Wire Terminations

Switch
Position

Circuit Continuity

Wire
Color

Switch Connections

Off

Open

Yellow

Motor low speed terminal

Intermittent

Yellow—Red and brown

White

Motor high speed terminal

Low speed

Yellow

Blue

Motor park terminal

High speed

White

Black

Ground

Brown

Brown

Washer pump

Red—Positive

Red

+12 Vdc (positive)

Washer

5
5
5
5
5
5

Black—Negative

5
5
5
5
5
5
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-5

5.2
5
5

Dimmers and Wipers
Rotary Wipers

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RW200 Series

5
5

Off/Park
20º

5

Washer
(Push In)

5

WIPER
WASHER

5

70º

1.176 +0.010 –0.025
(29.87 +0.25 –0.64)
Dia.
Fastest
Intermittent
Speed

20º Continuous
Low Speed
20º Ref
Continuous
Fast Speed

5

0.248 (6.30)
Dia.
EATON

5

Slowest
Intermittent
Speed

2.188
(55.57)

0.370 (9.40)
Flats

2.188
(55.57)
View B

5

1.358
(34.50)

5

0.609 +0.010 –0.015
(15.47 +0.25 –0.38)

5

0.424
(10.77)
3.029 +0.006 –0.010
(76.94 +0.15 –0.25)

0.099
(2.51)

5

2.230
(56.64)
1.805
(45.84)

5
5
5

Yellow
Lead

5

Blue Lead

3.335
(84.71)
Approx.

5

Black
Lead

5

White Lead

Red Lead
Brown Lead

4.505
(114.43)
Approx.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
V11-T5-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons
AC Rated Pushbuttons

6.1

AC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2

XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons

6.3

V11-T6-2
V11-T6-2
V11-T6-3
V11-T6-4
V11-T6-5

V11-T6-8
V11-T6-8
V11-T6-8
V11-T6-9
V11-T6-10
V11-T6-11
V11-T6-12
V11-T6-13
V11-T6-14
V11-T6-16
V11-T6-17
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-19

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

6

Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 580/581/586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 770/775 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illuminated AC/DC Rated Pushbuttons

V11-T6-2

V11-T6-21
V11-T6-21
V11-T6-21
V11-T6-21
V11-T6-22
V11-T6-22
V11-T6-23

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-1

6.1
6

Pushbuttons
AC Rated

Contents

AC Rated

Description

6

Page

AC Rated
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
6

V11-T6-3
V11-T6-4
V11-T6-5

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Product Description

Features

These general-purpose, AC
rated, pushbutton switches
offer a wide variety of
configurations, button styles
and termination types. The
7835 and 7836 light-duty
series pushbutton switches
are AC only. They feature
slow-make/slow-break butttype contacts with a light
operating pressure that is
particularly suited to
instrumentation applications.

●

●

Circuits
●
1PST, 1PDT, 2PDT
●
Momentary action
Terminal Types
●
Screw terminals, brass
(furnished unassembled)
●

●

8410/8411 Series
– #5-40 x 3/16 in
(Cat. No. 811-7206)

●

8406/8440 Series
– #5-40 x 5/32 in screws
(Cat. No. 11-26)

●

Solder lug, brass silverplated

6
6
6
6

8448 Series
– #6-32 x 3/16 in
binding head screws
(Cat. No. 811-2)

●

Hardware supplied
●
One hexagon locknut
(Cat. No. 15-192) and
one bright nickel-plated
knurled facenut
(Cat. No. 15-124F1)
●
8411/8418 Series has
a bright nickel-plated
hexagon facenut
(Cat. No. 15-966-2)
●
All hardware is furnished
unassembled
●
Other mounting types
are flush, nest and
snap-in

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Standards and
Certifications 1
●
●
●

UL® Recognized
CSA® Certified
RoHS 2

Notes
1
Except where noted.
2
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

Pushbuttons
AC Rated

6.1

Product Selection

6

Non-Illuminated

6

Light-Duty, Momentary Contact
Flush Mounted
Flush
Rating

Poles
and
Throw

Contacts

Circuit
Number 1

Button
Construction

Color

NC

A

Nylon

Black

Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)

Typical Max.
Operating
Force

Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number

0.468 (11.89)

0.7 lbs 3

Flush

8406K1

0.453 (11.50)

0.7 lbs 3

Flush

8410K1

6
6

Screw Terminals
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc
1PST
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc

Snap-in

6
6

Snap-in Mounted
Rating

Poles
and
Throw

Color

Typical Max.
Operating
Force

Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number

Nylon

White

0.375 (9.53)

—

Snap-in

8423K1 5

Nylon

White

0.375 (9.53)

—

Snap-in

8424K1 5

Button
Construction

NC

A

NO

A

Contacts

6

Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)

Circuit
Number 1

6

Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1PST
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc

Bushing

6

Bushing Mounted
Rating

Poles
and
Throw

Contacts

6

Color

Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)

Typical Max.
Operating
Force

Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number

Nylon

Black

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs 3

0.250 (6.35)

8411K5

6

Nylon

Black

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.468 (11.89)

8411K8

Metal

—

0.296 (7.52)

2.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8440K2 5

6

A

Metal

—

0.312 (7.92)

—

0.562 (14.27)

7835K11A 6

A

Nylon
(snap-on)

Black

—

—

0.562 (14.27)

7835K11C

Red

—

—

0.562 (14.27)

7835K11D

A

Metal

—

0.312 (7.92)

—

0.562 (14.27)

7836K11A 6

A

Nylon
(snap-on)

Black

—

—

0.562 (14.27)

7836K11C 6

Red

—

—

0.562 (14.27)

7836K11D 6

6

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.468 (11.89)

8411K7

0.375 (9.53)

1.5 lbs 4

0.468 (11.89)

8411K12

6

Button
Circuit
Number 1 Construction

6

Solder Lugs
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1PST
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc

NC

3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1PST
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc

NC

5 A, 12 Vdc,
3 A, 125 Vac 2

1PST

NO

3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST

NC

3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST

NO

A
A
A

Screw Terminals
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc
1PST
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc
5 A, 12 Vdc,
3 A, 125 Vac 2
3 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST

NC

A

NO
NO

A

Nylon

Black

NO

NC
1PST

NO

0.296 (7.52)

2.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8440K3

Metal

—

0.312 (7.92)

—

0.562 (14.27)

7836K13A

0.312 (7.92)

—

0.562 (14.27)

7835K12A

Metal

—

0.312 (7.92)

—

0.562 (14.27)

7836K12A

Spade Terminals (0.250 in)
1PST
1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc
3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST
3 A, 125 Vac

1PST

NO

A

NC

A

NO
NC
NO

A

Nylon
Nylon
Nylon

Red
Black
Black

4

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.250 (6.35)

8411K13

0.468 (11.89)

8411K10

6
6

5

6
6

0.375 (9.53)

1.5 lbs 4

0.468 (11.89)

8411K11 5

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs

0.250 (6.35)

8418K1 5

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8418K12 5

Notes
1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable.
3 To change operating pressure, refer to your local Eaton Sales Representative.
4 Operating pressure cannot be changed.
5 Combination spade and solder lug terminal.
6 Items are normally in distributor stock.
7 Standard length is 6 in (152.40 mm), stripped 0.625 in (15.88 mm).

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

6

6

—

A

6

6

Metal

Wire Leads 7
3/4 A, 125 Vac
1 A, 250 Vac
1/10 hp, 125 Vac

6

5

A
1PST

6

6
6
6
6
6

V11-T6-3

6.1
6
6

Pushbuttons
AC Rated

Non-Illuminated
Medium-Duty, Momentary Contact
One-Hole

6

One-Hole Mounted
Poles
and
Throw

Rating

6

15 A, 125 Vac
1PST
10 A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

15 A, 125 Vac, NO
10 A, 125 Vac, NC
10 A, 250 Vac, NO
5 A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac

1PDT

NO

A

Metal

—

B

Metal

B

15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac

2PST

NO

15 A, 125 Vac
1PST
10 A, 250 Vac
1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac

NO

15 A, 125 Vac, NO
10 A, 125 Vac, NC
10 A, 250 Vac, NO
5 A, 250 Vac, NC
1/2 hp, 250 Vac
1/4 hp, 125 Vac

1PDT
NO, NC

15 A, 125 Vac
10 A, 250 Vac

2PST

Technical Data and Specifications

6

AC Rated

0.9 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8444K3

0.250 (6.35)

0.9 lbs

0.343 (8.71)

8444K4

—

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8434K2

Bakelite

Black

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8435K2

C

Metal

—

0.250 (6.35)

—

0.343 (8.71)

8448K2 2

A

Metal

—

0.531 (13.49)

0.9 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8444K2

B

Metal

—

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8434K1

B

Bakelite

Black

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8435K1

NO

C

Metal

—

0.250 (6.35)

—

0.343 (8.71)

8448K1 2

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables on Page V11-T6-3 and the table above.

Contact material
3–6 A rated

Movable, silver-plated copper
Stationary, silver-plated copper

10–15 A rated

Movable, silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button
Stationary, copper with fine or coin silver contact face button

Wire leads

6

18 gauge, 6 in (152 mm) long, skinned 0.75 in (19 mm)
Lengths beyond 6 in (152 mm) are additional charge

Mounting means—One-hole mount

6

Threaded bushing—0.468 in dia. 32 threads/inch (11.90 mm)
Keyway—0.068 W x 0.035 D in (1.73 W x 0.89 D mm); provides anti-rotation feature
Keyway on 7835/7836 Series is 0.080 W x 0.040 D in (2.03 W x 1.01 D mm)

Operating temperature range

0 °F to 150 °F (–17.8 °C to 65.6 °C)

6

Mounting or Bushing
Length Dimensions
Catalog
“A” in Inches (mm)
Number

0.531 (13.49)

6

6

Typical Max.
Operating
Force

NO, NC

6

6

Color

Button Extension
Dimensions “B”
in Inches (mm)

Spade Terminals (0.250 in)

6

6

Button
Construction

Screw Terminals

6

6

Contacts

Circuit
Number 1

Notes
1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18.
2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable.

6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons
AC Rated

6.1

Dimensions

6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.312
(7.92)

6

8410

7835K12A
Keyway
0.080–0.085 W x 0.040–0.047 D
(2.03–2.16 W x 1.02–1.19 D)

6

1.000
(25.40)

0.562
(14.27)
0.625
(15.88)

0.312
(7.92)

0.562
(14.27)

6

0.460 (11.68)
Dia.

6

B
0.780
(19.81)

1.180
(29.97)

0.230 (5.84)
Stroke

0.310
(7.87)

6

1.610 (40.89)
1.500 (38.10)
0.060 0.250
(1.52) (6.35)
1.100 (27.94)
1.060 (26.92)

0.090 (2.29)
Dia.
2 Holes

0.060
(1.52)

6

8411K5 and 8411K13

0.250
(6.35)

0.150 (3.81)
2 Holes

6

0.650
(16.51)
Dia.

1.060
(26.92)
Dia.

0.310
(7.87)

6

0.290 (7.37)
Dia. Button

1.120
(28.57)

8406

1.370
(34.80) 0.840
(21.34)
1.870
(47.50)

6

B

6.000
(152.40)

0.812
(20.62)

6

1.870
(47.50)
1.500
(38.10)

0.469 (11.89)–32 TPI

0.484
(12.29)

6

0.150 (3.81)
Mounting Holes

0.343
(8.71)

6
6

1.250
(31.75)

6

0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)

1.000
(25.40)

6
6

0.250
(6.35)

Spade Terminal

Screw Type Terminal

6
6

8411K11 and 8411K12

8411K7 and 8411K8
0.460 (11.68) Dia.
0.310 (7.87) Dia.
0.040 (1.02)
0.180 (4.57)

6

0.070
(1.78)

0.260 (6.60)
Stroke

6

B

B

6

0.460 (11.68)
0.090
(2.29)

0.060
(1.52)

2.090
(53.09)
1.250
(31.75)

1.950 (49.53)
1.840 (46.74)
1.070 (27.18)
1.010 (25.65)

0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)

0.032
(0.76)

Screw Type Terminals

2–#5/40 Binding
Head Screw

0.340
(8.64)

0.032
(0.76)

0.340
(8.64)

6
6

0.650 (16.51)
0.670 (17.02)

6

Screw Type Terminals
#5/40 x 0.188 (4.57)
Large Binding
Head Screw

6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-5

6.1
6
6
6
6
6

6

AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8411K10 and 8418K12

0.310 (7.87)
Dia.

8423 and 8424

0.340 (8.64)
Stroke
0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit

0.460
(11.68)

0.850 (21.59)
Dia.

0.370 (9.40)
Extension

0.030
(0.76)
0.670
(17.02)
Dia.

0.370
0.300 (9.40)
(7.62)

0.950
(24.13)

0.469 (11.91) 2.120
(53.85)
1.270 Dia. –32
(32.26) Threads
per Inch

6
6

Pushbuttons

0.560
(14.22)
Hex

1.350
(34.29)

0.850
(21.59)
Dia.

0.340
(8.64)

0.240
(6.10)

0.340
(8.64)

0.740 (18.80)
Dia. max.

Note: Use 0.780 (19.81) dia. hole
on 0.060 (1.52) thick panel.

0.250
(6.35)

6
6
6

8418K1

0.220 (5.59) Stroke
0.310 (7.87)
and Extension
Dia.

0.469 (11.89)
Dia. –32 1.750
1.270 Threads (44.45)
(32.26) per Inch

6

0.030
(0.76)

6

0.460 (11.68)
Dia.

0.560
(14.22)
Hex

0.250
(6.35)

0.700
(17.78)

0.230
(5.95)
0.300
(7.62)

0.340
(8.64)
0.670 (17.02)
Dia.

0.520
(13.21)
Stroke
0.620
(15.75)

B

6
6

0.100
(2.54)
0.040
(1.02)

0.040 (1.02) Max.
Pre-Travel to Break Circuit

6
6

8434K2 and 8435K2

0.030
(0.76)
Ref

0.970
(24.64)
1.210
(30.73)

3–#6-32 x 3/16 LG
Binding Head Screw

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway

Pushbuttons
AC Rated

6.1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
8440

6

8448K1
0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.230 (5.84) Dia.

0.030 (0.76)
to 0.070 (1.78)
Pre-Travel

0.030 (0.76)
Button
Depressed

0.290
(7.37)
0.460
(11.68)

6

0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact
0.250
(6.35)
Stroke

6

0.300 (7.62) Dia.

6

0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch

6

#15-32 Threads
0.340
(8.64)

0.680
(17.27)

0.460 (11.68)
Dia.

1.200
(30.48)
1.310
(33.27)

0.620
(15.75)

0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway

6
6

0.750
(19.05)

6
6

8442 and 8444 (Screw Terminals)
0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel
to Make Contact

8448K2

0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32
Threads per Inch
B

0.940
(23.88)
1.210
(30.99)

0.260
(6.60)

0.340
(8.64)

0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway
0.250 (6.35)
Stroke

6

0.469 (11.91) Dia.
–32 Threads per Inch

0.300 (7.62)
Dia.

0.620
(15.75)

A

6

0.090 (2.29)
Button Travel to
Make Contact

6
6

0.460 (11.68)
Dia.
0.040 (1.02)
0.070 (1.78)
Keyway

0.760
(19.30)

1.060
(26.92)

1.320
(33.53)

6
6
6

0.750
(19.05)

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-7

6.2
6

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Contents

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Description

6

Page

Illuminated AC/DC Rated
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
6
6
6

V11-T6-9
V11-T6-14
V11-T6-16
V11-T6-17
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-18
V11-T6-19

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Product Description
Eaton offers a wide range of
pushbutton switches for
standard industry applications
such as appliances,
electronics, medical and test
instrumentation, office
equipment and many other
commercial applications.

A variety of options are
available such as illuminated
and non-illuminated versions,
colored lens caps, lamp
styles and mounting styles.

6

Each pushbutton series
offers a matching indicator
for a consistent look. See the
Product Overview tables to
quickly identify the required
product. Then, refer to the
Catalog Number Selection
and Product Selection tables
to determine the catalog
number.

6
6
6

Product Selection Guide

6

General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated
Series

206/208

Page

220/221/224

Page

231/234

Page

Standards and
Certifications 1
●
●
●

UL Recognized
CSA Certified
RoHS 2

Notes
1
Except where noted.
2
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

580/581/586

Page

6

Pushbutton
Selection—Switch

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-10

6

Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-10

6

Pushbutton Cap
Selection

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

6

Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)

K, N

K, N

K, N

J, L, M

6

Series

6

Pushbutton
Selection—Switch

V11-T6-11

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

6

Pushbutton Cap
Selection

V11-T6-11

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

6

Pushbutton
Selection—Indicator

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

6

Circuit Diagram Letter
(See Page V11-T6-18)

Q

K, N

K, N

J, L

770/775

Page

810/815

Page

820/825

Page

6
V11-T6-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

860/861/845

Page

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234

6
6
6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 206/220 1 and 221 1/231 1, Switch

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Base Prefix
206 = 206 Series
illuminated
220 = 220 Series
non-illuminated
221 = 221 Series
illuminated
231 = LED display

206

Product Type
K = Switch

Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.
Number of
Poles
1 = 1PST
2 = 2PDT
Contact
Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT 2

K 1

1

9

Terminations
1 = Solder

Mounting 3
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers
Pushbutton Style
220 and 221
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte

1 2

D

Full/Top
Lens Color
All Series
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

03

05

S

Bottom
Lens Color
206 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

30
Pushbutton Height
206
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
220 and 221/231
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full

6
6

Lamp
206 7/220 and 221

6

Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
231
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc

6
6
6
6
6
6

231
M = Matte

6

How To Order—Series 208/224 1/234 1, Indicator

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Base Prefix
208 = 208 Series
indicators
224 = 224 Series
indicators
234 = 234 Series
indicators

Product Type
L = Indicator

Terminations
1 = Solder

208

L

1 2

Mounting 3
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
3 = Full barriers

Pushbutton Style
208/224
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte

D

03

Full/Top
Lens Color
All Series
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

05

S

Bottom
Lens Color
208 Series Only
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

30

6
6

Pushbutton Height
208 7
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full
S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
split
224/234
A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm)
full

Lamp
208/224
Incandescent 5
Example:
30 28-3158
234
LED lamps 6
Example:
02 Red, 5 Vdc

6
6
6
6
6
6

234
M = Matte

6
6

Notes
1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3 Refer to Page V11-T6-16 for barrier information.
4 Not available with lighted display.
5 Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6 Use two-digit item number, 01–19, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7 Accepts two bulbs.

6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-9

6.2

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 580/581/586

6
6
6
6
6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 580/581, Switch

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

581

K

1

3

9 1

0

T

6
6
6

Base Prefix
580 = 580 Series
non-illuminated
581 = 581 Series
illuminated

Product Type
K = Switch

6
6

6

Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
T = Translucent

Example:

Base Prefix
586= 586 Series
indicators

Product Type
L = Indicator

586

Terminations
1 = Solder

L

1

0

T 03

Mounting 1
0 = Chamfered bezel
1 = Flat bezel

Pushbutton Style
M = Matte
T = Translucent

6
6
6

Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 2

Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)

Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

6

6

B 30

How To Order—Series 586, Indicator

6
6

1 = Solder

Contact Material
5 = Silver plate
9 = Gold plate

6
6

Terminations

Number of Poles
1 = 1PST NO
2 = 1PST NC
3 = 2PST NO
4 = 2PST NC
5 = 2PST NO/NC

6

6

Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.

03

B 30
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 2

Notes
1
Flush with bezel.
2
Not available with lighted display.
3
Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.

6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Pushbutton
Height
A = 0.270 in
(6.9 mm)
B = 0.330 in
(8.4 mm)
C = 0.440 in
(11.2 mm)

Lamp
Incandescent 3
Example:
30 28-3158

6.2

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 770/775

6
6
6
6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 770 1, Switch
To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Base Prefix
770 = 770 Series
illuminated

770

Product Type
K = Switch

K

1

1

9 1

Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.

1

M 03

Terminations
1 = Solder

Number of
Poles
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT

Mounting 2
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style

Contact
Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold

M = Matte

6

01 G 80

Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue

Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split

Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157

Base Prefix
775 = 775 Series
indicator

Product Type
L = Indicator

Terminations
1 = Solder

1

1
2

Mounting
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
Pushbutton Style
M = Matte

M 03
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue

01 G

6
6
6
6
6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

775 L

6

6

How To Order—Series 775 1, Indicator

Example:

6

80
Pushbutton Height
F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
full
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
full
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
full 2 3
S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
split

6
6
6
6

Lamp
Incandescent 4
Neon 5
Example:
80 28-3157

6
6
6
6
6
6

Notes
1 Full or split cap style available.
2 Flush with bezel.
3 Not available with lighted display.
4 Use two-digit item number, 51–59, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
5 Use two-digit item number, 80 or 81, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.

6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-11

6.2

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825

6
6
6
6
6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 860 and 861/810/820, Switch 1

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

6
6
6
6
6
6

Base Prefix
860= 860 Series
non-illuminated
861= 861 Series
illuminated
810= 810 Series
illuminated
820= 820 Series
illuminated
Product Type

6
6

Action
1 = Mom.
2 = Alt.

6
6
6

1

Number of
Poles
860 and 861
1 = 1PDT
3 = 2PST

Mounting 3

Contact Material
8 = Silver
9 = Gold
6 = 2PDT/2PST 2

6
6

03 B 02
Pushbutton Height
860 and 861
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)

Full/Top Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 4

Lamp
860 and 861
Incandescent 5
Example:
02 28-3154-2
810
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example:
93 Red, 20 mA
820
Incandescent 5
Neon 8
LED 6
Example:
70 28-3156

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Base Prefix
845= 861 Series
indicator
815= 810 Series
indicator
825= 820 Series
indicator

Product Type
L = Indicator

Terminations
1 = Solder

845 L

Mounting 3
845
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
815/825
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers

1

2

D 03 B

Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
20 = Gray
21 = Black 4

30

Pushbutton Height
845
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7
815/825
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)

Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
T = Translucent

6

6

D

Pushbutton Style
C = Clear
D = Deadfront
F = Filtered
M = Matte
T = Translucent

860 and 861
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers
2 = Horiz. barriers
810/820
0 = No barriers
1 = Vert. barriers

820
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT NC

2

How To Order—Series 845/815/825, Indicator 1

6

6

9 1

Terminations

6

6

3

1 = Solder

810
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT

6
6

K

K = Switch

6
6

861

Notes
1
Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code.
2
Pole one is silver, pole two is gold.
3
Flush with bezel.
4
Not available with lighted display.
5
Use two-digit item number, 02–14, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.
6
Use two-digit item number, 93–97, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.
7
Not available with lighted display. Available only on “M.”
8
Use two-digit item number, 70, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.

V11-T6-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Lamp
815
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Example: 30 28-3158
825
Incandescent 5
LED 6
Neon 8
Example: 93 Red, 20 mA
845
Incandescent 5
Example: 37 28-3158-8

6.2

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps

6
6

Series 206/220/231 and Series 580/770/810/820/849

6
6
6
6
Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 206/220/231, Pushbutton Caps

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

Base Prefix
206 = 2 lamp display
(Series 206/208) 1
220 = Non-illuminated
Series 220 and illuminated
Series 221, 224 and 234
231 = LED display on
Series 231 and 234

Product Type
P = Pushbutton

206 P

C

03

Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color
insert, transmitted color
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap and
color insert 2
M = Matte, no insert, transmitted
color

04

6

S

Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
13 = Light green
15 = Clear
20 = Gray 4
21 = Black 4

Cap Height 5
A = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
full
S = 0.19 in (4.8 mm),
split

Base Prefix
580 = Series 580, 581, 586 6
770 = Series 770, 775 3
810 = Series 810, 815
820 = Series 820, 825
849 = Series 845, 860, 861

Product Type
P = Pushbutton

6
6
6
6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

580 P

6
6

How To Order—Series 580/770/810/820/849, Pushbutton Caps

Example:

6

C

03

Display Legend/Style
C = Clear cap and color insert,
transmitted color 7
D = Deadfront, smoky gray
cap and color insert
F = Filtered color, white cap
and color insert 7
M = Matte, no insert,
transmitted color
T = Transmitted color, smooth
surface, solid color

04 B
Full/Top
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 = Black 4

Bottom
Lens Color
00 = Orange
01 = White
02 = Red
03 = Green
04 = Yellow
05 = Blue
10 = Amber
12 = Lunar white
15 = Clear
21 = Black 4

6
6

Cap Height

5

580
A = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
B = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
C = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
770
F = Full, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm)
H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm)
S = Split, 0.36 in (9.1 mm)
810/820
A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm)
B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)
849
A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm)
B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm)
C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm)

Notes
1 For a high degree of illumination, a full cap may be used with two lamp devices.
2 Available only with colors red, green, yellow and blue.
3 Available in matte only.
4 Not available for lighted display.
5 Measured from panel of top of pushbutton cap.
6 Available in translucent and matte only.
7 For two lamps, two colored inserts with divider.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-13

6.2
6
6

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Lamp Selection
Incandescent Lamps
Bi-Pin Base for 800 Series

6

To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

6

02

7361

5

0.06

0.05

0.63

100,000

03

28-3154-3

7945

6

0.04

0.03

0.38

10,000

6

07

28-3154-7

7381

6.3

0.20

0.40

5.03

50,000

08

28-3154-8

7371

12

0.04

0.12

1.51

10,000

09

28-3154-9

7330

14

0.08

0.50

6.29

750

10

28-3154-10

7382

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

50,000

6

28-3154-2

6

11

28-3154-11

7370

18

0.04

0.15

1.89

10,000

12

28-3154-12

7327

28

0.04

0.34

4.27

7,000

6

13

28-3154-13

7387

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

25,000

14

28-3154-14

7876

28

0.06

0.34

4.27

25,000

6

Midget Flange Base for 770 Series

6

To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

6

51

28-3155-2

345

6

0.04

0.03

0.38

10,000

54

28-3155-5

394

12

0.04

0.12

1.51

10,000

6

55

28-3155-6

330

14

0.08

0.50

6.29

750

56

28-3155-7

382

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

50,000

6

57

28-3155-8

370

18

0.04

0.15

1.89

10,000

58

28-3155-9

327

28

0.04

0.34

4.27

7,000

6

59

28-3155-10

387

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

25,000

6

Subminiature Wedge Base for 200 and 500 Series
To Order Lamp
Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

30

28-3158

56

5

0.115

0.15

1.89

20,000

6

31

28-3158-2

79

6

0.20

0.60

7.92

1,000

32

28-3158-3

84

6.3

0.04

0.03

0.38

20,000

6

33

28-3158-4

86

6.3

0.20

0.40

5.03

20,000

34

28-3158-5

18

14

0.04

0.13

1.63

5,000

6

35

28-3158-6

73

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

15,000

36

28-3158-7

85

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

7,000

6

37

28-3158-8

17

28

0.06

0.65

8.17

5,000

6

6
6

Notes
1 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
2
Standard tolerance for MSCP is ±25%.
3
Average life is for AC operation. DC life will be approximately 50% less. Operating incandescent lamps at 5–10% below rated voltage will generally increase lamp life 200–400%.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Neon Lamps 1

6

T 1-3/4 Bi-Pin Base Neon Lamp for All 800 Series “Shorty” Switches and Indicators 2
External
Resistance
Required

Ignition Voltage

DC

Average
Useful Life
(Hours)

AC

DC

Bulb Size

Lamp Length

Lead Length

150

1.5

25,000

47K (1/4 W)

95

135

T-2

0.60

0.25

CLC Lamp
Number

Circuit Volts
AC

70

7A1H

105–125

28-3156

6

Nominal
Current MA

Item
To Order Lamp
Number 3 Separately

6
6

T 1-3/4 Midget Flange Base Neon Lamps for All 700 Series Switches and Indicators 2
To Order Lamp
Item
Number 3 Separately

CLC Lamp
Number

Circuit Volts
AC

DC

Nominal
Current MA

Average
Useful Life
(Hours)

80

28-3157

A1H

105–125

150

1.5

25,000

35K (1/4 W)

None

95

135

T-2

0.67

81

28-3157-2

C-24

105–125

150

4.2

8,000

None

35K

95

135

T-2

0.67

External
Resistance
Required

Built-In
Resistance

AC

DC

Bulb Size

Maximum
Overall Length

Ignition Voltage

6
6

LEDs for Series 231 through 235 Switches and Indicators
Voltage 5
Vdc

6

5 Vdc

Yellow

Green

6
6

LEDs are sold installed only.

Red

6
6

LED Lamps 4

Color

6

Without Diode
Protection
Item Number

With Diode
Protection
Item Number

01

11

02

12

15 Vdc

03

13

Vdc 6

04

14

5 Vdc

05

15

15 Vdc

06

16

Vdc 6

07

17

5 Vdc

08

18

15 Vdc

09

19

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

T 1-3/4 Wire LEDs for All 800 Series Switches and Indicators
Luminous Intensity (MCD)

Item Number 3 Color

Forward
Current
(MA) 5

Minimum

93

Red

20

95

Green

96
97

Typical

Forward
Voltage (V)
Typical

Diffused or
Undiffused

6

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

6

Yellow

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

Amber

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

6
6

Notes
1 Neon lamps are not recommended for use with colored caps or inserts, especially those colored green or blue.
2 Recommended external series resistor values shown for indicated average useful life are for lamp and resistor
combinations used across 110–125 Vac, 1/4 W, ±10% tolerance.
3 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators.
4 For use with clear or white cap only.
5 5 Vdc and 15 Vdc include internal current limiting resistor. Other voltages available—contact your local
Eaton Sales Representative.
6 External current limiting required. User must include in circuit—to give current of 20 mA to LED.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-15

6.2
6
6

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Mounting Barriers Ordering Guide
Catalog Number Example: 200B1

6

When switches are individually mounted, add 0.10 in (2.54 mm) per switch to the appropriate
bezel dimension. When switches are gang mounted, add 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to the appropriate
bezel dimension for each switch mounted plus an additional 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to compensate
for gang mounting.

6

Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers 12

6
6

Product
Series
200

Product
Type
Barrier

Code
B

Barrier Type and
Description
End—Short

Code

3

1

6

Center—Short 3

2

6

End—Long 4

3

6

Center—Long 4

4

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

6
6
6

Legending
All legend markings are pad printed in accordance with the limitations below. Standard markings
are of condensed gothic type, 1/8 in high characters, with white letters on blue, red and green
translucent pushbuttons and black letters on white, yellow, orange and all filtered pushbuttons.

6

Legending

6

Pushbutton Size

Standard Pad Print
Limitations

6

1/2 in square pushbuttons

2 lines, 4 characters per line

5/8 in square pushbuttons—full legend

3 lines, 6 characters per line

6

5/8 in square pushbuttons—split legend

2 lines, 6 characters per line

6

3/4 in square pushbuttons

3 lines, 7 characters per line

3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—full legend

3 lines, 9 characters per line

3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—split legend

2 lines, 9 characters per line

6
6

Accessories

6

These snap-on pushbutton caps are made of molded plastic
for use with grooved style switches. They are ordered
separately for user assembly.

6

Snap-On Pushbutton Caps—Standard

6
6
6
6
6
6

Button Diameter
in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

Black molded

0.625 (15.88)

53-3338

Red molded

0.625 (15.88)

53-3338-2

Description

Notes
1 The full guard barrier is molded as an integral part of the switch body and is specified as a part of the complete switch catalog number.
2 An end barrier is attached to each side of housing. The center barrier is used between devices when gang mounting in a slot array.
3 For use with square devices and short side of rectangular devices.
4 For use with long side of rectangular devices. Use a center—long between switches if gang mounting.

6
6
6
V11-T6-16

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Technical Data and Specifications

6

General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated

6

Series

206/208

220/221/224

231/234

580/581/586

Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts

5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc

5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc

5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc
0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc

Silver or Gold: 1 A at 125 Vac
Gold-plated contacts for low level

Action

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Switch Circuitry

Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT
2-independent lamp circuits

Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT

Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT

Double break
1PST or 2PST

6

Termination Types

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm)

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1

0.02 x 0.110 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1

0.01 x 0.11 in (0.31 x 2.79 mm) 1

6

Pushbuttons

0.62 x 1.00 in (15.87 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
Full or horizontal split lens
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.63 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.50 in (12.70 mm)
Square
3 heights above panel E 3
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

Mounting

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in
(0.76 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting
Choice of two bezel styles:
Chamfered or Flat
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

One rectangular LED flush with cap
Various voltages available
Diode protection available

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps
Incandescent
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

Pushbutton Travel

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.17 in (4.32)

6

Series

770/775

810/815

820/825

860/861/845

6

Ratings—
Silver Contacts
Gold Contacts

10.5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

6 A at 125 Vac or 3 A at 250 Vac
0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

Action

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary
Alternate with positive latch down

Switch Circuitry

1PDT or 2PDT (2 circuit)
2-independent lamp circuits

Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT

Break before make
1PDT or 2PDT

Double break
1PST or 2PST, NO

Termination Types

0.02 x 0.125 in (0.25 x 3.18 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1
Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1

Pushbuttons

0.73 x 0.97 in (18.54 x 24.64 mm)
Rectangular
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.75 x 1 in (19.05 x 25.40 mm)
Rectangular
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.75 in (19.05 mm)

0.62 in (15.87 mm)
Square
Horizontal split legend
(indicator only)
3 heights above bezel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

Panel mounting retained by molded
sleeve and nut
May be individually mounted
or gang mounted in horizontal
or vertical rows
Panel thickness from 0.03 to 0.25 in
(0.76 to 6.35 mm)
Barrier mount available 4
Snap mount available

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting
Stainless steel retaining clips
Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in
(1.59 to 4.76 mm)
Barrier mount available 4

Lamps

Accepts two T 1-3/4 midget flange
base lamps
Incandescent or neon
Front relampable

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base
Incandescent, neon or LED
Front relampable
Lamp stationary to reduce
mechanical shock to filament

6

Pushbutton Travel

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

6

Lamps

Mounting

Square
2 heights above panel 3
5 styles
Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

6
6

6
6
6
6
6
6

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Notes
1 Terminations are suitable for solder or female 110 connectors. Series 770: Solder only.
2 See Engraving and Hot Stamping table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.
3 See Product Selection tables on Pages V11-T6-9–V11-T6-12 for more information.
4 See Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

6
6
6

V11-T6-17

6.2
6
6

SinglePole

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

1
2
3

6
6
6

TwoPole

1
2
3

4
5
6

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

FourPole

Circuit Letter

6

All views are rear of switch with
keyway or at down as applicable.
Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and
5 and 8 are considered inboard
terminals for single-, two- and
four-pole switches respectively.
All others are considered
outboard.

Momentary contact

C
2PST

2
3

D
2PDT

1
2
3

E
4PST 1

F
4PDT 2

Legend

Rocker Switch Type
Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever
Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever
Center terminal and switch lever
Bulb

Denotes mechanical contact portion
Notes
1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices.
3 Dependent lamp.
4 Independent lamp.
5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being
controlled may be independent of each other.
6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available.
7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

Schematic

I
2 circuit 5

1

4

3

6

2

4

1

3

J
1PST

1
2
3

K
1PDT

5
6

L
2PST

4
5
6

2 5 8 11
3 6 9 12

7 10
8 11
9 12

1 4
2 5
3 6

G3
1PST

4

6
6

Pushbutton Legend

Circuit Letter

2
3

B
1PDT

6
6

Schematic

A
1PST

6
6

10
11
12

When specified on order,
switches will have the terminals
identified as shown in the
illustration at right. Terminal
markings will be ink-stamped on
the side of the switch case and
unused terminal positions will
not be identified.

Pushbutton Circuit Diagrams

6
6

7
8
9

4
5
6

Legends

Circuit Diagrams

6
6

1
2
3

Terminal Identification

M
2PST

2 4
1 3

6

N
2PDT

P
1PDT

2
6

3
H4
1PDT

4
2
3

6

6

Q7
2 circuit

B
A

C
C

NC NO
H
G
NC
NO

6
6
6
V11-T6-18

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

6.2

Pushbuttons
Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Dimensions

6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1.400
(35.56)

0.312
(7.92)

0.190
(4.83)

0.890
(22.61)

0.310
(7.87)

0.705 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

0.740
(18.80)
2

C

NO

NO

0.900
(22.86)

0.400
(10.16)

1.200
(30.48)
0.990
(25.15)

B

0.400
(11.18)

1.133
(28.78)

0.625 ± 0.010
(15.88 ± 0.254)
0.400
(10.16)

1.140 + 0.005
(28.96 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.600 0.800
(15.24) (20.32)

LEGEND
LEGEND

0.625 + 0.010
(15.88 + 0.254/
– 0.000)

0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.

0.685
(17.40)
Typ.

1.400
(35.56)

0.312
(7.92)

6

0.500
(12.70)
Typ.

6
6

0.125
(3.18)

0.190
(4.83)

NC

NC

C
NO

0.800
(20.32)
Typ.

0.500
(12.70)

LEGEND

0.550
(13.97)
1.190
(30.23)

0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

0.600
(15.24)
Typ.

6

0.730
(18.54)

0.960
(24.38)

0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

C
NO

6

0.120
(3.05)

0.970
(24.64)

0.400
(10.16)

6
6

770 Series

220 Series

6
6

LEGEND

C A

6

A = 0.270 (6.86)
B = 0.330 (8.38)
C = 0.440 (11.18)

NC

NC

0.740
(18.80)
Typ.

6

580 Series

206 Series

6

2.200
(55.88)

F-S = 0.360 (9.14)
G = 0.270 (6.86)
H = 0.120 (3.05)

1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)

6
6

Panel thickness
0.030 (0.762) to
0.250 (6.35)

6

0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)

6
6

0.940
(23.88)

0.400
(10.16)

0.740
(18.80)
Typ.

NC

0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)
0.800
(20.32)
Typ.

NC

C
C
NO

NO

0.500
(12.70)
LED

0.312
(7.92)

6

810 Series

231 Series

1.400
(35.56)

0.100
(2.54)
0.190
(4.83)

0.600
(15.24)
Typ.

1.070
(27.18)

0.910
(23.11)

C

L

0.300
(7.62)

6

1.000
(25.40)

6

0.310
(7.87)

6

0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.

C

L

6

LEGEND

0.750
(19.05)

0.750 + 0.005
(19.05 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

0.140
(3.56)

1.170
(29.72)

A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)

0.875 ± 0.005
(22.23 ± 0.127)
1.110 ± 0.005
(28.19 ± 0.127)

6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-19

6.2
6
6
6

6
6

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
820 Series
0.160
(4.06)

860 Series
0.940
(23.88)
Typ.

0.160 (4.06)
0.660
(16.76)

6
6

Pushbuttons

0.025
(0.64)

0.310
(7.87)

A = 0.330 (8.38)
B = 0.440 (11.18)
0.910
(23.11)

6
6

1.110 (28.19)

0.090
(2.29)

LEGEND

0.280
(7.11)

0.750
(19.05)
Typ.

0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.

0.010 (0.254)
Rad. Max.

0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

0.850
(21.59)
Typ.

0.515
(13.08)

LEGEND

0.280 (7.11)
0.840
(21.34)

0.250
(6.35)

0.875 + 0.005
(22.23 + 0.127/
– 0.000)

0.620
(15.75)
Typ.

0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)
0.310
(7.87)

0.755 ± 0.005
(19.18 ± 0.127)

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-20

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

A = 0.240 (6.10)
B = 0.350 (8.89)
C = 0.140 (3.56)
1.000
(2.54)

Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton

6.3

Contents

XP Series Sealed Pushbutton

Description

Page

XP Series Sealed Pushbutton
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T6-22
V11-T6-22
V11-T6-23

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Product Description

Application Description

Eaton’s Vehicle Control
business is pleased to offer
our newest line of sealed
pushbutton switches with
multiple color options for
ease of application
identification.

●

These pushbuttons are
available in a standard circuit:
OFF—ON (Momentary).
Included with each switch is
the necessary mounting
hardware as well as a rubber
panel seal gasket.

●

●

●

Lawn and garden
equipment
Industrial and commercial
equipment
Fire trucks and safety
vehicles
Light recreational vehicles

Features
●

Mounting hardware
included (packaged
separately)
●
5/8 inch internal toothed
lock-washer
●
5/8-24 UNEF-28
panel nut
●
Rubber panel seal
gasket

6

Standards and
Certifications
●

●

UL Recognition at 6 A,
125 Vac, and 3 A, 250 Vac
RoHS Compliant 1

6
6
6
6

Note
1
Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for
the most up-to-date list of verified
part numbers.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-21

6.3

Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton

XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons

6
6
6
6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.
Example:

6

Series

6

Circuit

XP = XP Series

H = SPST OFF–(ON)

XP H N T 3 XX
Frame Color

Actuator Color
G = Green
N = Blue 1
T = Red
V = Black
Y = Yellow 1

N = Black

6
6
6
6

Mounting hardware included
(packaged separately)
●

Panel nut, internal toothed lockwasher, rubber panel seal gasket

1

Terminal
1 = Quick-connect spade
2 = Screw
3 = Solder lug

Contact your local sales
representative for price, MOQ
and lead-time for yellow and
blue version actuator colors.

6
6
6

Technical Data and Specifications

6

XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons

6

Description

Specification

Sealed level

IP64

6

Ratings

3 A: 250 Vac; 6 A: 125 Vac; 10 A: 12 Vdc, 28 Vdc

6

Mechanical life

1,000,000

Electrical life

25,000

6

Termination

Solder lugs, screw (M2 X 4), spade (0.189 inch quick-connect)

Operating temperature

–25 °C to 85 °C

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
V11-T6-22

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

Special Features
XX = None

Pushbuttons
XP Series Sealed Pushbutton

6.3

Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [Inches]

6

XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons

6
12.7 ± 0.5
[0.500 ± 0.020]

6

2.8 ± 0.5
[0.111 ± 0.020]

Ø18.5 ± 0.3
[0.728 ± 0.012]

6
31.4
[1.236]
18.7 ± 0.5
[0.736 ± 0.020]

Ø26.5 ± 0.3
[1.043 ± 0.012]

5.8 ± 1.0
[0.229 ± 0.039]

6

11.0 ± 1.0
[0.433 ± 0.039]

6

Ø2.25 ± 0.20
[Ø0.089 ± 0.008]
0.8 ± 0.1
[0.031 ± 0.004]

6

14.0 ± 0.3
[0.551 ± 0.012]

6
6

4.8 ± 0.10
[0.189 ± 0.004]
Mounting Hole

6
6

Solder Lug Version

6

Ø16.4 ± 0.1
[Ø0.647 ± 0.004]

6

Thickness 1.5–5.0 mm

6
9.5 ± 0.5
[0.374 ± 0.020]
1.00 ± 0.20
[0.039 ± 0.007]

6

9.5 ± 0.5
[0.374 ± 0.020]

6

M2 x 4

6

Rubber Panel Seal Gasket

6
6
M2 Screw Terminal Version

6

Quick-Connect Version

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—August 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-23

Definitions

7.1

Switch Terminology

7

Glossary of Terms
Term

7

Definition

One Pole (1P)—Single Pole (SP)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit.

Two Pole (2P)—Double Pole (DP)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit.

Two Circuit (2 CIR.)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits.

Single Throw (ST)

A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator.

Double Throw (DT)

A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator.

Normally Open (NO)

A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.

Normally Closed (NC)

A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.

Actuator

A lever, pushbutton, slide, trigger or other means to which an external force is applied to operate a switch mechanism.

Alternate Action (Double Action Push)

Push to make, then push to break a circuit.

7

Break-Before-Make

A non-shorting switch mechanism that opens or breaks a connection in a conductor before closing or making a connection in another
conductor.

7

Make-Before-Break

A shorting switch mechanism that closes or makes a connection in a conductor before opening or breaking a previous connection in
another conductor.

7

Life Expectancy

The useful life cycle performance of a switch mechanism to open or close, make or break, an electrical circuit, based on statistical
probability.

7

Operating Force

The force that must be applied to the actuator to move it from the free position to the operating position.

Operate Position

The position of the actuator at which the circuit transfers.

7

Release Force

In a momentary type switch, the value to which the force on the actuator must be reduced to allow the contacts to return to the normal
or rest position.

7

Momentary Action Switches

Momentary action switches turn a process ON and OFF when force is applied and then removed. The applied force can make the circuit change state
and the removed force returns circuit to its original state.

7

Maintained Action Switches

A type of device in which the switch or button physically keeps the circuit in the actuated position.

Half-Throw Circuit

A circuit where the actuator has only two positions (center and one extreme position) with a positive stop that prevents actuator movement to the
opposite extreme position.

7

7
7
7
7

7

Approval Marks 1
Mark

EN
EC

7
7

Country/Region

Definition

U.S.A.

UL® Recognized
Listing Number: Switches—E24354 or File E1148, WOYR2 1609; Indicator—E70176, E2702

Canada

UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Numbers: E2702, E180275, E43960 and E147754þ

U.S.A. and Canada

UL Recognized
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)

Canada

CSA®—Canadian Standards Associations (Certified)
Listing Number: LR10538 or 45995, 9002 Class 6241

U.S.A.

UL Listed
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number:þE180275

7

Europe

ENEC: European Norms Electrical Certification; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)

7

—

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2001/65/EU

7
7
7
7
7
7

7
7
7

Note
1 See specific product for specifications for applicable approvals.

7
7

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T7-1

7.2

Index

11-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33

28-3154_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14

13-5496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7

28-3155_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14

13-8171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7

28-3156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15

7

13-8173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T3-7

28-3157_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15

1500_–1507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-44

28-3158_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14

7

1500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-45

28-3425_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-65

15-1043_–15-1047_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-3426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76

7
7

7

15-1048-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31, 11-T4-33

28-5148_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-65

15-1049_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33

28-5415_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-62

15-124F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5555_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-72

15-1525_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76

7

15-189-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5637-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76

15-192_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5863_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-13

7

15-2523_–15-2528_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5901_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9

15-2534-14_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5909_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9

15-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

28-5940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-76

7
7

7
7
7
7
7
7

15-966-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

29-761-5_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-32

15-994-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31

2CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15

1600_–1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48

2N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14

1600H_–1620H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51

30-2899-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34

1609_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-49, 11-T2-53

30-5632-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34

1620HX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51

32-2245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-38

17-19263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

32-341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33

17-19264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

3CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15

17-19544-2_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

3N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14

17-21159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

53-3318_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

17-21160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

53-3338_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16

7

17-21543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-77

53-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11

17-22145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40

580K_–581K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10

7

17-22145_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40

580P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13

7

17-22146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40

586L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10

17-22152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40

61-40_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11

17-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11

6CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15

200B_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16

6N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14

7
7

7
7

206K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7071K_–7073K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-9

7

206P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13

7300K_–7317K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-6

208L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7500K_–7510K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12, 11-T4-15

7

220K_–221K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7530K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13

220P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13

7546K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12

7
7
7

224L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7555K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12

231K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7560K_–7569K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15

231P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13

7570K_–7571K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15

234L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9

7576K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12

7

2500_–2507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-44

7580K_–7587K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12

2500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-45

7590K_–7597K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13

7

25-13936_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-40

7630K_–7632K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13

7

2600H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51

2600_–2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48

V11-T7-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

Index

7.2

7660K_–7668K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-4

8423K_–8424K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-3

7670K_–7674K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-4

8434K_–8435K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4

7690K_–7695K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14

8440K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-3

7700K_–7705K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14

8444K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4

770K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11

8448K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4

770P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13

845L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12

775L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11

849P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13

7803K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-13

860K_–861K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12

7804K_–7805K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14

8800K_ -8860K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4

7810K_–7813K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-28

8857K_–8859K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5

7818K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-2

8928K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T4-20

7835K_–7836K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3

8980K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-4

7842K_–7846K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6

B1600_–B1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50

7933K_–7935K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14

B2600_–B2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50

7990K_–7992K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-28

DP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2

8004K_–8005K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-66

DS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2

8006K _–8007K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-63

E30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-7

8055K_–8057K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-56

E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-10

8064K_–8065K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-73

E321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11

810K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12

E324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11

810P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13

E33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-14

8130K_–8138K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-55

eSM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T1-7, 11-T1-10, 11-T1-11, 11-T1-13

8140K_–8148K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-55

eVu_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-17

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

8150K_–8155K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-55

MS25068_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4

815L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12

MS25098_–MS25100_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-3

8166K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-9

MS25125_–MS25127_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5

8179K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-42

MS25201_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4

820K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12

MS35058_–MS35059_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4

820P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13

NGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-8–11-T2-31

7

825L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12

NGR Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14, 11-T2-15

8261K_–8262K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-3

NGR Rocker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-11

7

8280K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20

NGR Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-10

8283K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6

P1600_–P1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48

8290K_–8295K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20

P2600_–P2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-48

8370K_–8373K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6

RW_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-4

8370K_–8375K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20

SVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-32–11-T2-40

8381K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20

SW1RY_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33

8391K_–8396K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20

WP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2

8406K_–8411K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3

WS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2

8418K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3

XTD_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-25

7
7

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—March 2014 www.eaton.com

V11-T7-3



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : Zoltun Design
Create Date                     : 2011:08:24 13:29:16-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2014:08:06 09:17:19-05:00
Subject                         : Vehicle and Commercial Controls
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Metadata Date                   : 2014:08:06 09:17:19-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS4 (6.0)
Thumbnail Format                : JPEG
Thumbnail Width                 : 256
Thumbnail Height                : 256
Thumbnail Image                 : (Binary data 10835 bytes, use -b option to extract)
Instance ID                     : uuid:fcf2cc4a-dff6-ea41-a99c-26b597405e5f
Document ID                     : xmp.did:826700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365
Original Document ID            : xmp.did:ED1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
History Action                  : created, saved, saved, saved, saved, saved, saved, saved, saved, saved
History Instance ID             : xmp.iid:ED1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81, xmp.iid:EE1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81, xmp.iid:EF1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81, xmp.iid:F01567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81, xmp.iid:F11567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81, xmp.iid:816700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365, xmp.iid:826700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365, xmp.iid:836700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365, xmp.iid:876700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365, xmp.iid:A13D717176CEE011820CFD0A37EB7532
History When                    : 2011:08:10 09:29:24-04:00, 2011:08:10 09:34:09-04:00, 2011:08:10 09:34:09-04:00, 2011:08:10 09:37:58-04:00, 2011:08:10 09:41:18-04:00, 2011:08:24 11:22:38-04:00, 2011:08:24 11:22:38-04:00, 2011:08:24 11:23:26-04:00, 2011:08:24 11:42:24-04:00, 2011:08:24 13:28:12-04:00
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0, Adobe InDesign 6.0
History Changed                 : /, /metadata, /, /, /metadata, /;/metadata, /, /, /
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:816700E764CEE011811AF9FDE3A93365
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:ED1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81
Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:ED1567C354C3E011B3FFAC5DA4A7BE81
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
Manifest Link Form              : DirectStream, ReferenceStream
Manifest Placed X Resolution    : 72.00, 300.00
Manifest Placed Y Resolution    : 72.00, 300.00
Manifest Placed Resolution Unit : Inches, Inches
Manifest Reference Instance ID  : uuid:EEC144858F91DD11AC73A4AED5B610AD, xmp.iid:AF394E5E13CBDF11B9C3F0B5D3E985A9
Manifest Reference Document ID  : uuid:C7143732532111DD958FC1F669DED174, xmp.did:213029D85ECADF11A0A2E5DD50A331B9
Doc Change Count                : 63
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Zoltun Design
Title                           : Volume 11 iBook
Description                     : Vehicle and Commercial Controls
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 9.0
Trapped                         : False
Page Count                      : 202

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools